The URL can be used to link to this page

MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - 09-0056-PRI 1 Czearwatef 1 PARKS & RECREATION DEPARTMENT CITY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR ' MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS CONTRACT # 09-005-PR 2400 HARK BLVD. Clearwater, Florida 33764 DECEMBER 2009 1 1 1 ° rwatef ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT Received MAR 0 8 2010 City Attomey TO: Gwen Hollander, Legal Staff Assistant I ;) FROM: Kathleen Bedini, Engineering Staff Assistant DATE: March 5, 2010 MESSAGE: Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations 09-0056-PR Attached is the contract document for the above project for signature. This project was awarded at the February 18, 2010 Council Meeting. The contractor has already signed it. After it has been signed in Legal, please route for completion of necessary signatures. Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact me. Thank you, Kathleen Bedi Engineering Staff Assistant 727) 562-4782 ADDENDUM NO. 1 DATED: January 8, 2010 ' TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL. FOR: CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: Morningside Aquatic Center PROJECT NO. 094W-,&PR DATED: December 28, 2009 PREPARED BY: PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 PHONE: 727-5624856 FAX: 727-562-0825 RECEIVED JAN 14 20?0 CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT THIS ADDENDUM NO. 1 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, DRAWING SHEETS, SECTION rV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND QUESTIONS FROM PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS FOR MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09.01]6 PR OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THIS WORK, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PROPOSAL FORM. 1 1 1 PART I PROJECT MANUAL Item Na 1: Bid Date Time Revisions Revised Advertisement of Bids & Notice to Contractors 1. Revised bid date information see attachment Addendum No. I. Section 1 - Advertisement of Bid & Notice to Contractor Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bidg, 100 South Myrtle Ave., Yd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, JANUARY 21,20 10, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR. Item No. 2: Last Date Day for Submission of Project Questions by Prospective Bidders 1 _ Last day questions accepted for Momingside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations 10:00 AM, Friday, January 15, 2010 no other questions will be accepted after this time and date. Answers will be sent out Friday, January 15, 2010, 2010. 2. Questions sent in writing to: Parks & Recreation Department Leroy Chin -- Park, Planning & Project Manger E-mail: r m arwate co Fax: 727-224-7101 Mail: P. O. Box 4736 Clearwater, FL 337584748 Item No. 3: Revisions to the Scope of Work 1. Revisions to the Scope of work for Morningside Aquatic Center. See attachment revised Scope Of Work pages 1 of 126, 2 of 126 and 3 of 126. Item No. 4: Section V Contract Bond & Bid Form has been revised and shall be utilized when contractor is submitting his proposal for the Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations 15 pages 1. Provide Project No. 09-0056-PR, changes to base bid and alternate items. Item No. 5: Mandatory Pre-Bid Sign in Sheets I . Seven pages of the mandatory pre-bid sign in sheets. Item No. 6: Construrtion Drawings & Additional Information from Pinellas County Health Department 1. Pinellas County Health Department Main Pool Modification Plan Approval & Special Purpose Pool Modification Plan Approval plans are similar as those provide in the bidding documents and submitted to the City of Clearwater Building Department for the building permit. The pool contractor awarded the project shall collect the building permit for implementation of the Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations Project No. 09-0056-PR (no fee will be required for the building permit). Attached are six pages of comments from the Pinellas County Health Department to the existing pools (Spccial Purpose Pool Modification Plan Approval & Main Pool Modification Plan Approval) is provisionally approved under CENTRAX number 52-60-SP03228 provisionally approved: subject to the provision stated on these documents and implemented by the pool contractor. 2. City of Clearwater modification to plans to clarify questions & additional information for contractor in renovations to the Main Pool Sheet 4 of 6 3. City of Clearwater modification to plans to clarify questions & additional information for contractor in renovations to the Special Purpose Pool Sheet 5 of 6 4. Gardner B. Collins P. E. drawing Pool improvements Modifications Date 12-14-98 Sheet 1 Of 1, information on mechanical room filter plan & filter section. Item No. 7: Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference Meeting Minutes L Attached is the Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference Meeting Minutes (three pages) and Pre-Bid Meeting Additional Information (one page) END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 11 t ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS t ll 1 PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR - ADDENDUM NO. 1 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myC]earwater.com/cityproyects, ON MONDAY DECEMBER 28, 2009, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction, cost only. The work for proposals consists of plumbing separation of the diving well/lap pool (main pool) from special purpose pool. All plumbing associated with the special purpose pool shall be eliminated from the existing aquatic mechanical electrical room and the main pool; conversion of special pool from gutter pool to a skimmer pool; installation of new filtration system, renovation of plumbing in pool mechanical room; resurfacing of lap/diving well pool, special purpose pool and activity pool and retiling of pools; construction period 60 calendar days from notice to proceed. MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on THURSDAY JANURY 7 2010 10:00 AM AT THE MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER - 2400 HARK BLVD CLEARWATER FLORIDA. Representatives of the Owner and Pool Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 South Myrtle Ave., Yd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, JANUARY 21,_ 2010, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available only to contractors who have ten years of experience in municipal, commercial, and large pool construction and who provide a minimum of three references relating specifically to the type and size of work that shall be performed for this project with a pre- qualification amount of $150,000.00. Pool contractors must pre-qualify and any contractor ??ot meeting these requirements will be disqualified and their bid will not be accepted. The pre- qualification application is included at the end of the technical specification section IV of the contract documents. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 t Sectionl.doc Page 1 of 1 8/27/2008 1 t Section IV - Technical Specifications - Addendum No. 1 SCOPE OF W RK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: hlorningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations Project Num ber: 09-0056-PR Scope of Work: A. General Notes 1. The pool contactor shall contact City of Clearwater Solid Waste for roll off in disposal of waste from this project. 2. The pool contractor shall review check list from the Pinellas County Health Department for modifications of the pools at the Momingside Aquatic Complex and perform all items on the check list for all three pools, lapdiving pool, special purpose pool. The pool renovations shall be performed according to the Florida Building Code Chapter 64E-9 Public Swimming Pools And Bathing Places attached in this document. The pool contractor shall note items not shown on the drawings or in this scope of work does not constitute the pool contractor to not perform the renovations and required work as based in Florida Building Code Chapter 64E-9 Public Swimming Pools And Bathing Places. 3. The pool contractor is required to obtaining the building permit from the City of Clearwater - Planning & Development Services Department There is no fee for this permit. The pool contractor is required call in all inspections. 4. The pool contractor is required to obtain final inspection and pool operation from Pinellas County Health Department prior to close out of the project. 5. Pool contractor is required to balance pool chemical for 5 days prior to inspection by the Pinellas County Health Department turnover of the project to the owner. The owner will provide all chemicals for this balancing procedure, 6. The owner will provide electricity and water for the construction of this project. 7. The pool contractor shall be required to provide his own sanitation for his employees. 8. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount and submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard AIA form in making his application for payment on or prior to the 25i° of every month. This application shall be submitted to the engineer for his review and approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with each payment. 9. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work and minor and major milestones for the project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be provided at the pre- construction meeting as well as a list of sub-contractors with contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 10. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a list of shop drawing as well as list of material submittals for review by the engineer and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the engineer as the requited submittal list. 11. The owner shall require 2 copies of the each shop drawing and material submittal and shall be maintained by the contractor in separate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out materials. Also included is a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, addresses, telephonelcell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 12. Submittals shall be sent directly to the architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for Pool Staff Review at the same time they are sent to the engineer. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pic-comiruction meeting- 13 . The contractor shall note the contract duration is 60 calendar days for construction of this project from notice to proceed. No additional days will be allowed- 14 . Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates shall be determined at the pre-construction meeting. IS, The contractor shall police the site of any construction debris and any trash can for his employees on a daily meals and breaks at the job site. In no case shall trash from meals or breaks left on the construction site at the end of the day's work. 16. Contractor to review Pinellas County Health Department provisionally approved under new CENTRAX No.52-60-SP03228 for main pool and special purpose pool and is to be performed by the successful bidder of the Momingside Aquatic Center Renovations. I T The pool contractor at time of bid shall determine if non-skid the are required for vertical tiles by the health department if they are not he shall adjust his proposal accordingly. All steps and horizontal surfaces shall receive non-skid tiles. 13. Divi Well a Pool I. Work consists of separation plumbing of the diving well and lap pool (main pool) from special purpose pool. All plumbing associated with the special purpose pool shall be eliminated from the existing pool mechanical electrical room. Existing pool mechanical/electrical room will contirue operating the main pool. The main pool plumbing shall remain. Contractor shall review drawing sheet 3 of 10 piping schematic and shall disconnect pipe within 5 feet of main pool, special purpose pool and aquatic mechanical room. Contractor shall cut and remove a 'U' shape 4'x8' concrete slab outside the mechanical room and remove piping front the aquatic mechanical room at this location. All piping to be abandon shall be capped. 2 Pool gutter pipes 11,11 be pressure tested for leaks and repair as necessary- Replace all gutter grates and install new Hayward SP1019 socket fittings after replacement gutter system piping the entire system shall be re-pressure tested. Scope of work.docx Page 1 of 126 9/4/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications - Addendum No. 1 Scope of Work Morningside Aquatic. Center Pool Renovations Continued.., The main pool gutter perimeter shall be reconstructed and made level. 4. All existing mosaic tiles in gutter shall be removed, lane lines, targets and other tiles of the entire pool shall be removed surfaces to be prepared to receive new tiles or exposed aggregate. The pool contractor shall note the guner surface will not have mosaic tiles reinstalled and diving well will not receive new lap lane tiles or targets, these areas shall receive new pool exposed aggregate surfacing Marquis or alternate Hydrazzo as specified in the bill of quantities no substitution will be allowed. If the owner selects the Hydrazzo surfacing the contractor mast provide a 10 year warrant), for the Hydrazzo surfacing. All new tiles shall be set with thin set for new tiles. 5. Replace dive markers and depth markers shall be 25 feet on center. 6. All steps of main pool shall rebuilt as required current health department codes. 7. Existing recess step sections shall be filled in and prepared to receive exposed aggregate surface. 8. Install new stainless steel cross brace ladders and bronze anchors shall be installed 75 feet on center. 9. Install new lap lane recess cup anchors at both ends of lap lane lines. Lap lane ropes will be provided by the owner. 10. Install new cup anchors for safety line at location separation of diving well from lap pool. 11. Remove dump slide, chain link fence and pluming for the dump slide. The contractor shall depose of all items removed from the site and disposed of properly. 12. Main pool beam shall be constructed according to the detail, apply bonding agent and patch area hydraulic non-shrink cement concrete, Entire ' bond beam shall have medium broom finish perpendicular to the pool. 13. Upon removal of all tiles of the main pool the contractor shall sound existing pool surface of hollow spot and remove theses hollow areas. This sounding shall be for the entire main pool. After sounding the main pool the entire surface of the main pool shall be sand blasted to remove all loose existing exposed aggregate surfaces. The contractor shall apply bonding agent compatible and approved by the exposed aggregate finish manufacture prior to applying exposed aggregate surfaces. 14. The contractor shall inspect the pool shell after sand blasting and determine if there are any cracks n the pool shell. In the base bid bill of quantity there is a provision allowance for the crack repair. The pool contractor shall inform the owner and engineer upon completion of his inspection. The pool contractor shall schedule a meeting with the owner and engineer to determine the quantity of lineal feet of crack repair required this ' agreed quantity will paid based on unit price by dividing the 150 lineal feet into the lump sum price. The crack repairs are to be completed and inspected by the engineer prior to the exposed aggregate surface installation. 15. Install five new stainless steel heavy duty backstroke post and bronze anchors and shall be electrically bondedto the pool system- 16. Pool contractor shall remove and refurbish both diving board structures and reinstall and shall be electrically bonded. The pool contractor shall be required to provide anchors for the diving board, templates and set anchors at time of concrete pours of the new concrete pod decks by others. 17. All new and existing metal components shall be electrical, grounding, wiring and bonding to comply with Chapter 27, Florida Building Code FBC2007_ Chapter 27 Electrical, NEC Section 690.26(C). No overhead power within 10 feet of pools. Electrician must certify compliance to r engineer - (See bonding not SB2836,6-20-07) For bonding and grounding system for swimming pools, the use of an underground bonding conductor made of #8 AWG. Bare Solid copper wire buried to a minimum of 4 inches to 6 inches below sub-grade, and 18 to 24 inches from inside wall of a swimming pool or spa, is deemed a permissible alternative or equivalent to compliance with S680.26(C) of the National llectrical Code. The pool contractor is required to provide access to the component installed by pool contractor for electrical contractor to electrically bond all metal components- The pool contractor will be required to coordinate and cut concrete slabs for electrician to install wiring conductors to electrically bond all metal components for the pool works of the Momingside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations. C. Swe.al Pnroose Pool 1. The special purpose pool shall beconverted into a skimmer pool. The perimeter of the special purpose pool beam gutter system plumbing shall be reconstructed into a skimmer pool system. New steps shall be constructed on the deep end of the pool as shown on the drawings. 2. A new VAK-PAK filtration system shall be provided for the special purpose pool see sheet 5 of 6 for locaton and additional information. 3. Pool contractor shall be required to pour concrete slab 2 feet beyond the outside edge of the VAK-PAK filtration system. And shall be 6" thick at 3,000 psi with commercial fiber mesh. 4. The existing piping of the special purpose pool shall be located. The main drain of the special purpose pool shall be relocated to accommodate new stair steps. Retum line shall be utilized and connected to the VAC PAK filtration system. See plan for piping system. As indicated previously the special purpose pool is to be disconnect from the main pool filtration system and all plumbing disconnected shall be capped. 5. Probe cleaner, strantrols and feeders are to be provided by the pool contractor, made operational and installed in a weatherproof PVC box which is ultraviolet resistance. Warning system of the strantrols system mounted in the pool reception desk area for monitoring by the pool Iifeguards. 6. All new piping shall be installed a minimum of 30 inches below finished grade. All piping shall be pressure tested to 100 psi for 24 hours. The pool contactor shall notify the engineer when this test is performed- 7. Sounding shall be preformed for the entire special purpose pool and hollow spots shall be removed. After sounding the pool the entire surface of the special purpose pool shall be sand blasted to remove all loose existing exposed aggregate surfaces- The contractor shall apply bonding agent r compatible and approved by the exposed aggregate finite manufacture prior to applying exposed aggregate surfaces. 8 All existing tiles shall be removed and surface prepared to receive new tiles, 9. Replace dive markers and depth markers shall be 25 feet on center. Scope of work.doca Page 2 of 126 9/9/200 r Section IV - Technical Specifications - Addendum No. 1 ' Scope of Work Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations Continued.,. 10. All steps of special purpose pool shall rebuiltas required current health department codes. H. All new hand rails shall be heavy duty stainless steel with bronze anchors and provisions shall be made to have the electrically grounded see note 15 above Lap Pool Diving Well scope of work. D. Activity Pool 1. Activity pool shall have all play activity feature items removed except for palms bases. Palm bases shall be inspected to determine if required for ' removal and refinishing or refinishing in place. The activity features shall be sent to manufacture for refurbishing by the owner and reinstalled after the pool has been or prior to installation of specified exposed aggregate surface. All exposed bolts and other protruding items to be covered with exposed aggregate surface. 2. All existing tiles shall be inspected for damage tiles. Damaged tiles to be removed and prepared surfaces to receive new tiles. 3. Sounding shall be preformed for the entire activity pool and hollow spots shall be removed. After sounding the pool the entire surface of the training pool shall be sand blasted to remove all loose existing exposed aggregate surfaces. The contractor shall apply bonding agent compatible and approved by the exposed aggregate finish manufacture prior to applying exposed aggregate surfaces. The contractor shall inspect the filtration system of the activity pool filtration system and shall repair as necessary and shall provide a one year warranty operational system at final handover of the project to the owner. 4. The contractor shall confirm in the Florida Building Code Chapter 6413-9 Public Swimming Pools And Bathing and provide disinfection equipment capable of feeding 12mg9L of Halogen to the continuous recirculation flow of the filtration system and provide the necessary components to satisfy this requirement and be include in his proposal to be installed and operational upon certification for pool operation by the Pinellas County Health Department. S. The pool contractor shall inspect the Vak-Pak filtration system and make any necessary repairs for its operation and required replacement parts shall be included in his proposal for this project. The contractor shall provide a one year operational warranty of the Vak-Pak unit. It will not be expected the pool contractor to replace major components such as motors, pumps strantrol controller or pH metering devises under the one year ' operational warranty, however it is expected the pool contractor has completed his due diligent and inspected such items such as DE filters, valves and any miscellaneous terns have been inspected and replace as routine refurbishing maintenance and pool renovations. E. Existing Mechanical Electrical Room 1. The contractor shall review Modification of Pool Equipment sheet 6 of 6 of photos showing modifications of equipment in the existing mechanical-electrical room. The pool conractor is required to make these modifications as shown on this drawing. 2. The contractor shall remove concrete slab, excavate to depth of pool piping, disconnect piping of training pool and dump slide and cap piping to be abandoned. The abandoned piping and valves shall be removed from the wall and in the pump room. The wall shall be patched with high strength hydraulic concrete allowed to cure and the outside wall shall have a bituminous mastic applied for water proofing the wall. The excavations shall be filled and compacted to sub-grade of the concrete slab. Owner will pour 4" thick concrete exposed aggregate slab with 3,000 psi concrete in 28 days with commercial fiber mesh. ' 3. The pool contractor shall inspect all valves and remove all piping related to the disconnection of the special purpose pool from the man pool. 4. Contractor shall dismantle filter tank pit and resurface filter tank and reinstall filter tank elements upon completion of resurfacing exposed aggregate surface of filter tank pit. The pool contractor shall inspect the DE filters for any damages and replace them as necessary prior to reinstallation. F. Scone of Work Not Included and, Performed/Pro iv ded by the Owned 1. Removal of existing site furnishing, benches, picnic tables, bleachers shade canopy and netting. 2. Removal of concrete pool deck shims. 3_ Electrical service, electrical panel, electrical bonding 4. Installation of new shade canopies ' 3. New concrete decks 6. New fencing 7. Water 8. Electricity 1 Scope of work.docx Contract Period: Sixtv 60 Co secutive Calendar bavs From Notice to Proceed Page 3 of 126 9/9/2008 11 i;1 STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF 1 t 1 1 SECTION V BOND NUMBER: CONTRACT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we Contractor and (Surety) whose home address is as HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of: Dollars ($ ) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the day of 20 , entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and. save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. SectionV Contract. !Bond, and Bid rorm.doc Page 1 Revised: 5/11/2006 t 1 t t J CONTRACT BOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of , 20 ATTEST: 1 WITNESS: ' COUNTERSIGNED: 1 1CUi1111V Contract. Bond_ and Bid Form.doc 1 Page 2 CONTRACTOR By: SURETY By: ATTORNEY-IN-FACT Revised: 5/1 1 /2006 i i i CONTRACT This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of , 20 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and of the City of County of and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equi following: pment for the In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HERESY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. %ectionV Contract. Bond, and Bid Form.doc Page 3 Revised: 5/11/2006 1 d 1 1 1 1 CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause- The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 p per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. ' It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or ' sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional ' bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful ' performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and famished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. it 1.1 ScctionV Contract. Bond, and Bid Form.doc Page 4 Revised: 5/1 1/2006 1 t t t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: By: Frank Hibbard, Mayor-Councilmember (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). SectionV Contract. Bond. and Bid Form.doc Pate 5 (Seal) Attest: Cynthia E. Goudeau, City Clerk Approved as to form: Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney (Contractor) By: (SEALI Revised: 5/11 /2006 1 t 1 1 1 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT CORPORATION FO STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is the of of business located (TITLE) a Florida Corporation, with its principal place (herein, the "Contractor"). That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of 20 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROTECT NO. 09-0056- PR That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. ' That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me AFFIANT This day of , 20 1 BY: NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT SectionV Contract. Bond. and Bid Form.doc Page 6 Kevised: 5/11/2006 1 1 t t u 11 1 i C PROPOSAL BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, as Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Dollars ($ ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of _ as Principal, and Surety, for work specified as: all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this day of , 20 (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individual) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title; the person signing for a corporation must, by affidavit, show his authority to bind the corporation. Principal By: Title Surety as SectionV Contract. Bond. and Bid Form.doc Paee 7 Revised: 5/11/2000 I 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: Street & Number City County State Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that is wkjincer's ivame) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for for said corporation by virtue of (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of the Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption). Sworn to before me this Affiant day of 20 Notary Public Type/print/stamp name of Notary Title or rank, and Serial No., if any SS ectionV Contract. Bond. and Did Form.doc Page S Revised: 5/1 112006 r-, J ' NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF ' being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is of the party making the :Foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain ' from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. 1 [l 1 Affiant Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of 20 Notary Public SectionV Contract. Bond. and [aid rorm.doc Page 9 Revised: 5/1 1/2006 1 PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked ' MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR Drawings Prepared by GB COLLINS ENGINEERING PA Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all ' the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, ' General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and ' agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General ' Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: 1 1 1 1 SectionV Contract, Bond. and Did Foun.doc Page 10 Revised: 5/11/2006 1 1 1 1 1 1 PROPOSAL (z) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Bank, for the sum of (being a minimum of I0% of Contractor's total bid amount). ($ The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary, If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: Signature of Bidder: r (The bidder must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual). 1 I GectionV Contract. Bond. and Bid Fomi_doc Page I 1 Revised: 5/11/2006 PROPOSAL (3) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. By: Business Address of Bidder: City and State: Dated at Title: this day of Zip Code A.D., 20 SectionV Contract- Bond, and Bid Form.doc Page 12 Revised: 5111 12006 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. (Name of Bidder) (Signature of Officer) (Title of Officer) (Date) Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date. SectionV Contract. Rond_ and Bid Form.doc page 13 Revised: 5/1 1 /2006 I BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR ITEM EST. UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNI TY. PRICE A. Following items included in base bid: 1. Base bid shall include all work as required in the contract drawings and specifications and addendtuns prepared by G B Collins Engineering PA Inc for the Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations - Project No. 09-0056 - PR Lump Sum 1 $ 1 2. Provide necessary procedures for crack repairs of pools shell after sounding and sand blasting pool has been performed ' the pool contractor shall inspect the surface with the owner to determine the quantity of lineal feet of actual crack repair is required to be performed and will be paid by the quantity of lineal feet crack repairs made allowance 150 lineal feet. Lineal feet 150 $ 1 .i. Removal, refurbish as necessary and reinstall 2 one meter diving platforms includes electrical bonding hardware, anchor 1 bolts, templates & assisting in placement of the anchor bolts prior to pouring concrete pool deck by others Lump Sum ) $ 4. Performance Bond Lump Sum ) $ 5. SUB TOTAL OF LINES 2, 3, & 4 S 6. TEN PERCENT CONTINGENCY* (10% CONTINGENCY OF THE SUB TOTAL OF ITEM 5 $ *(Note contingency funds shall only utilized upon written approvd by the Owner or the owner's representative to utilize these fund for additional Scope of Work not indicated in item 1 of the Bill of Quantities. Contingency funds not utilized in the implementation of his contract shall be returned to the owner by final change order during close out of the contract.) ' 7. GRAND TOTAL - ITEMS 5 and 6 INCLUDES 10% CONTINENCY $ CONTRACTOR NAME: ' BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ITEM 7 WHICH INCLUDES TEN PERCENT CONTINENCY 5 (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ITEMS 7 WHICH INCLUDES TEN PERCENT CONTINGENCY 1 S (Words) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN ' THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. THE CITY OF CLEARWATER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT ALL BIDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTE ALL BID ITEMS SHALL BE PRICES AND BLANKS LEFT ON ANY ITEM THE BE WILL BE CONSIDERED A NON RESPONSIVE BID AND WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED IN AWARDING THIS PROJECT. ' THE CITY OF CLEARWATER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELECT ANY AND OR ALL OF THE ALTERNATE ITEMS AND OR REJECT ANY AND ALL ALTERNATE ITEMS. THE ALTERNATE ITEMS SELECTED SHALL BE UTILIZED IN THE TABULATION OF THE PROJECT AND SHALL DETERMINE THE LOW BIDDER TO BE AWARDED THE MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS Project No. 09-0056-PR ScctionV Contract. Bond. and Bid Form.doc Pace 14 Revised: 5/11/2006 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL CONTINUED ' PROJECT: MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR ' An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Alternates. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Altemate. Include as part of each Alternate. miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT TY. PRICE B. The following are alternate add items: I . Add alternate pool contractor to provide Hydrazzo Surfacing in lieu of Marautz surfacing. The contractor must provide a 10 year warranty for the Hydrazzo surfacing L.S. Should Owner elect not to provide new concrete deck pool around main pool contractor shall provide cost for removal of concrete at gutter drains to install new Hayward SP 1019 Socket LS, Saw cut concrete deck for owner electrical contractor to install Electrical conductor for bonding the metal pool elements of main Pool and special purpose pool 650 lineal feet LS 4. TOTAL OF LINE ITEMS 1-3 ADD ALTERNATES CONTRACTOR NAME: THE CITY OF CLEARWATER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELECT ANY AND OR ALL OF THE ALTERNATE ITEMS ABOVE AND OR REJECT ANY AND ALL ALTERNATE ITEMS. THE ALTERNATE ITEMS SELECTED SHALL BE UTILIZED IN THE TABULATION OF THE PROJECT AND SHALL DETERMINE THE LOW BIDDER TO BE AWARDED THE MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR SectionV Contract. Bond. and Bid Form.doc Page 15 Revised: 5/11/2006 1 ` 1 1 1 rrw F, vJ xz? W (? a Q? C#4)a USA C7 1 Hoz U A C? Q w 1 1 1 O C 4, a Q z a o -? w a O a z w N U ? , x a ? a rA? Q VJ rr??, Vz ? a a H 0 ? w FF d V A w x CIS N , U w z 0 H d 0 .a .4 4 0 M1 ? J` C J _ v L i r? .] b a r4k n C ? ? ? CC ? eC as ? w i w w po w c? CL( ? J z ?. y VJ a ? e cd ? w [ J c Q c a w c ? L ai ? 4) +r LO) o U U V U t n L J J Q ""r CA ? ?E 4 v ? ?' F w W F Q t .x ?? N ? C e? ai O O ? i[ 4 ,?? YC O ? ?! 0o w w? o ? eG Z w O r r di ?" r eC .5a r cQ ? r CC L. - r w pp r eC .C a a, a.wrsr0.1w .wrz,r}? c,wwr?a. w 0-4 U r??raA z ? w ? VIZ ? ?' W-4 W Q a r? ? 0 q ¢, A < V' w 1 o z a ?+ c o o , Cr U r ? .r o ? ' 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 o ? u ? H c Q m C ._ Q o W a w w c x ? z rz.,? o w ?w c C Qua ° w ?` Q q W W ° W ?A E „ ° a U W Z w U t' U How ? ?z U z Q Q A ? ' q? d , , cnv 1 , 1 . W A Q U 0 0 u u u U A r.. U ? ? o 4 V K a~ ? u G 1 C O o V U J o ?v 3Q i? J n k"' Cc, o C, wwwwwww wwwwr?a SJ ? ? J v W I v Pk 10.4 W wa W L w ?n 0 0 1 o, 0 ? O r F ? w? n z 1 ?w az? a d A W q A ? ' W U ? Z U ' FpW d z V 4 d ,, ,., w ' zZ ? y A C7 Z N ¦r 1 U W 1 t d 0 d GN 0 N n d C Q A 0 N 0 N d U O J fi d w ? J z c ra `° t R '? a oo C .C - a aww e a a.ww r 01 ;:61 x, ?[ www o yS awr a w . , h ? 0 a ? ? ww ? 06 U V ? ? o ? ` •ti i? 0 p ? z z r? y u ? w ? 1 ?U r t ._ t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F Wz ?w H dAA ww A C7 QW W a ? ? d d w va © ? C/1 o F d a a ? O ? O W ? F z w ? N U W U Q a d w a Q Q ? A q ? G7 F ? ? W O F ^F w p d ? O A. y F J^^.:? F COO ?- h 6i d w w z d 0 a Q r ? N cc V- a,Wwa.Wrx wWr?wWwwWpk91.4 ?a,Ww 0 J ? ? d Ca• L ? o Q ? U d Ua Go? 0 u A d 43 U P,r o a UU 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 t H W E., ?W W FZi H z a ?A W W W Q O ? Ix HpW A ? ? W R Q( IL d, Q a r/? c O ? 4 ? ?C a 0 R. 0 z ° ? N U c= N ? /may ? V ? O V ? ? F O V A W ti a V) Q z 0 U a o ? p r G L Q ea W G L: 0 ? G G ? z ? a 0 0 ? u v G w w ? UU? I? a u C 0 U i z 4 ? tom. ? O O U U N 1 ? r N.] ? C ? L+ ? ?' RS ? ? ? !C 1 GC ? ?C0 d 'C3 c z . W fz , w W f? r ? , G 1 f? . P , W f?, ? + , W Gz . 4 . W Gz . ? ? W f? , lz? i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a a o q c ? ? ° Q W ? z o q ? o w w ? ? z c? WW1 C?' ? H z ?" ? x QqW A ?::Q ?" w V w I? z N U Ora Foz a ? w U ? Q ? A Q zz w q ¢ ? z W A U z z O U A F Q ? O a V IrLI rV V Q ?n 04 , kn w Y p I _ +e?? .. ? ? q ? p e?C S ? •ca ? ?eC °? •eC c a w w rs. cc awrz J? oC a,wrs. a. " i C C wr?. J'. cQ a wr .C w eC C , f.' . ? wcz. A4 •z a ou r w U U CC l? QO a ? L 4 R Q s. =?- r UU J ._ ? 11 1 Charlie Grist ' Governor t 1 t 1 1 1 1 R,ORMA DEPARTMENT of HEALT Ana M. Viamonte Ros, M.D., M.P.H. State Surgeon General PINELLAS COUNTY HEALTH DEPARTMENT December 28, 2009 Mr. Samuel Liberatore, P.E. Gardner B. Collins, Engineering, P.A. 1268 Roger Street, Clearwater, FL 33756 Re: Morningside Complex 2400 Harn Boulevard Clearwater, Pinellas County 52-60-SP00278 Main Pool Modification Plan Approval Dear Mr. Liberatore: own&r 0'0? The above referenced modification to the already approved project under CENTRAX number 52-60-SP00278 is provisionally approved; subject to the following provisions: 1. When night swimming is proposed, an engineer licensed in Florida shall provide certification that the deck and surface lighting requirements of paragraph 64E-9.006(2)(c), FAC have been met. 2. When performing the resurfacing work the following must be observed: • Pool finish is white or a color pre-approved by this Department. • Tile marking color is black or a color pre-approved by this Department. • All single pieces or waterline tile must be at least as large as the rule requires for the waterline tile: Either 4" X 4" or 6" X 6", and 6" X 6" for the back of the gutter, each tile a minimum size of one inch on all sides, and 2" X 2" minimum on the pool wall gutter lips. • If 1" tiles are used in the pool, adhesive is certified for shear strength (250 psi) and underwater use. • Pool coping shall not overhang over the pool more than one and a half inches- * Slope break has 2"- 6" wide dark contrasting marking across bottom and up sides at the transition point. • Pinellas County Health Department shall be notified in writing at least 10 days prior to commencement of resurfacing works; the notification shall itemize all proposed work that is to be performed, the license number of the contractor and shall indicate that all work will meet the requirements of paragraphs 64E- 9.005(2)(a) through (g), FAC. Also, please note the following procedures: 1. The number of inlets shall handle the recirculation flow with a maximum of 20 gpm per inlet. The required flow for this pool is 193,600 gallons _ 360 min = 538 gpm, allowing a bathers load of 107 persons. The total number of inlets: 14 floor and 6 wall inlets is insufficient to handle the total flow of 538 gpm, 27 is the right number of inlets. Please increase the total number of inlets to 27, new additional 7 inlets, or the total number of bathers has to be reduced to 80. 2. If underwater lighting is used it shall provide at least/: watt per square foot of pool water surface area, low voltage (15volts maximum) transformers and electrical circuits are to be utilized, each underwater shall be grounded and underwater incandescent lamp size does not exceed 300 watts and are located at least 18" below normal water level, the top lip of gutter. No underwater lighting is Tel: (727) 535-7277 Environmental Engineering Fax (727) 538-729; 4175 East Bay Drive, Suite 300 Clearwater, FL 33764 H F 1 1 t 1 1 1 L? Mr. Samuel Liberatore, P.E, Gardner B. Collins, Engineering, P.A. Morningside Complex (52-60-SPOO278) December 28, 2009 Page two shown in the plans; if installed please note the installed underwater lighting parameters in form DH916. 3. Chapter 64E-9, F.A.C. requires that diving facilities shall meet the minimum requirements of the FINA dimensions for diving facilities in accordance with the 2005-2009 FINA handbook, i.e.: • All diving equipment shall be permanently attached to the pool deck and shall have slip resisting surfaces. • The equipment shall be designed specifically for swimming pool use and shall be installed as per manufacturer recommendations. • All diving equipment higher than twenty one inches (21") measured from the deck to the top butt end of the board shall have stairs or a ladder. The treads shall be self-draining. • Diving equipment one meter or higher small have guardrails. The top of the guardrails should be thirty-six inches (36") above the diving board and extend to the edge of the pool wall. • when the diving area is part of the main pool, the diving area shall be delineated from the swimming area of the pool by the placement of a rope and float line. Pool users shall not be allowed to enter the diving area from the main part of the pool. • All diving equipment must have an unobstructed vertical clearance of thirteen feet (13') in all directions around the board or platform. The clearance shall be measured from the center of the front end of the board, and extends horizontally as follows: a. 16 feet ahead of the board b. 8 feet to each side of the board c. 8 feet behind the front edge of the board. • The depth of the water and surface area dimensions of the designated diving area determine the allowable number, type, location, and height above the water of diving boards. The diving area dimensions are outlined in the drawing attached to this approval letter. 4. Vacuum fittings shall have spring-loaded safety covers, be flush mounted and no more than 15" below water level. 5. All the Pool old piping shall be physically located, identified and pressure tested. 6. All recirculation lines to and from the pool shall be individually valved with proportional flow type valves in order to control the recirculation flow. 7. One diaper changing table shall be provided at each restroom, 8. The pool signs shall include the following: • No food or beverages in pool or on pool wet deck • No glass or animals in the fenced pool area (or So feet from unfenced pool) • Bathing Load: _ persons • Pool hours: _ a.m. to _ p.m. • Shower before entering • Do not swallow the pool water Any revisions to the approved plans must be submitted to this office for approval. Prior to opening the pool for use an initial and annual operating permit must be obtained. Four (4) copies of the application form DH 916 must be completed, signed, and sealed as indicated, and submitted to this Department-along with the appropriate fee(s). A final inspection must be scheduled with this office. To avoid a premature application, we request that you not send us the completed DH 916 form with signatures until the construction of the pool is complete and in accordance with approved plans and specifications and approved modifications. At the time of the inspection, the pool should be filled with water, the water be properly balanced, and all pumps and equipment be operational; i.e_, the pool is finished, ready to operate, and ready for final inspection- Please be advised that if the pool is not ready to open at the time of our engineer's inspection, we may have no choice but to formally deny the application for t t t t t t 1 1 1 Mr. Samuel Liberatore, P.E. Gardner B. Collins, Engineering, P.A. Morningside Complex (52-60-SP00278) December 28, 2009 Page three an operating permit, which would then require the owner to submit a second complete form before we inspect the pool again. Operating permit applications must be accompanied by certification by the electrical contractor or electrical inspector that the electrical equipment wiring and grounding of the pool was performed in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. Your attention is specifically directed to the necessity of your monitoring of construction of the pool to ensure compliance with the approved plans- If you should have any questions about the review, please contact me at (727) 538 717r pJ nsion 1112, by email ;ose Gonzalez doh.state,fl.us , or at the letterhead address. dcg L. nz U? ?Z 4 -W' es 10 61 gineer Lic? 6468 6??ironme t ealth & Redness Division 'Z4 :1-4 +? ' MY•L-M *;V-ks`F'lanning & Project Manager, 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, Room 120; Clearwater, FL j ?+ \\\ File ?J J I i 11111\ 11 ' Minimum Dimensions for the Diving Portion of Pools (This drawing does not show the shallow portion of the pool) 1 Typical position of tip of hoard relative to PL A PL A PL B Water Line PL C PL D 1 ? 1 ' 11 Max. slope --r 5 r-11' Max slope 5 5' Min. ' D, Min. ,,) D2 in. c a' 1 in 12 Max slope Class B 1 in 10 Max slope class c 3 Max slope -Ls Min. r-L4 Min. ' LS Min. Note: L, is a minimum dimension to allow sufficient length opposite the board. This may be lengthened to form the shallow portion of the pool. Diving Equipment Max Maximum Minimum Pool Board Board Height Diving Area Minimum Dimensions Width of Pool at: ' _Type Length over Water D, D2 R I L, Lz La I L4 Ls Pt. A Pt. B Pt. C VI 10' 26" (2/3 m) T-0" 8'-6" 51-6" 2'-6" B' 0" 10'-6" T-0" 28'-0" 1t3'-0" 18'-0" 18' U" VII 212 30" (3/4 m) E8'-6" 9'-0" 6'-0" 3'-0" 9'-0" 12'-0" 4'-0" 28'-0" VIII 6' 1 Meter 10'-0 T-0" 4'-0" 10'-0" j 15'-0" 2'-0" 31'-0" 20'-0" 22'-0"' 22'-0" IX 1 i 3 Meters 11'-0" 12'-0" 8'-6" 6'-0" 101-6" 1 21'-0"' 0 37'-6" 22'-0" 24'-0" 124'-0" ' L,, L3, and L, combined represent the minimum distance form the tip of the board to the pool wall opposite the diving equipment. For board heights exceeding 3 meters see Article 4.5.4 of ANSI/NSPI -1 1991. ' Note: Diving board placement requires the following minimum distances from the boards to the sides of the pool and between adjacent boards. Deck Level Board to the Side Wall 8 feet ' 1-Meter Board to the Side Wall 10 feet 3-Meter Board to the Side Wall I 1 feet I-Meter or Deck Level Board to a 3-Meter Board 1 1 feet ' 1-Meter or Deck Level Board to another I -Meter or Deck Level Board 8 feet 3-Meter Board to another 3-Meter Board 10 feet 1 -. t t Charlie Crist ' Governor FLORIDA DFPARTIvtENI OF HEALT Ana M. vianionte Ros. M.D., M.P_H. State Surgeon General PINELLAS COUNTY HEALTH DEPARTMENT December 29, 2009 M,, Samuel Liberatore, P.E. Gardner B. Collins, Engineering, P.A. 1268 Roger Street, -Owner t Clearwater, FL 33756 Re: Morningside Complex 2400 Harn Boulevard ' Clearwater, Pinellas County 52-60-SP03228 Special Purpose Pool Modification Plan Approval Dear Mr. Liberatore: The above referenced modification to the already existing pool is provisionally approved under new CENTRAX ' number 52-60-SP03228; subject to the following provisions: 1. When night swimming is proposed, an engineer licensed in Florida shall provide certification that the deck and surface lighting requirements of paragraph 64E-9.006(2)(c), FAC have been met. 2. When performing the resurfacing work the following must be observed: • Pool finish is white or a color pre-approved by this Department. • Tile marking color is black or a color pre-approved by this Department. • All single pieces or waterline tile must be at least as large as the rule requires for the waterline tile: 6" X 6" for skimmer pools, each tile a minimum size of one inch on all sides. • If 1" tiles are used in the pool, adhesive is certified for shear strength (250 psi) and underwater use. ' Pool coping shall not overhang over the pool more than one and a half inches. • Slope break has 2"- 6" wide dark contrasting marking across bottom and up sides at the transition point. • Pinellas County Health Department shall be notified in writing at least 10 days prior to commencement ' of resurfacing works; the notification shall itemize all proposed work that is to be performed, the license number of the contractor and shall indicate that all work will meet the requirements of paragraphs 64E- 9.005(2)(a) through (g), FAC. Also, please note the following procedures: 1. If underwater lighting is used it shall provide at least Y: watt per square foot of pool water surface ' area, low voltage (15volts maximum) transformers and electrical circuits are to be utilized, each underwater shall be grounded and underwater incandescent lamp size does not exceed 300 watts and are located at least 18" below normal water level, the top lip of gutter- No underwater lighting is shown in the plans; the existing lights are destroyed when the stairs in the deepest part are spanned; if any underwater lighting are installed please note the installed underwater lighting parameters in form DH916. 2. The electrical equipment wiring and installation shall conform to the National Fire Protection Association 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), 2008, and with applicable local codes. 3. Vacuum fittings shall have spring-loaded safety covers, be flush mounted and no more than 15" below water level. F el. (727) 518.7277 Environmental Engineen110 Fax: (727) 538-729; 417> Fnst Bay Drive, Suite 300 ClearN ater. FL ? 3764 1 r? ?J Mr. Samuel Liberatore, P.E. ' Gardner B. Collins, Engineering, P.A. Morningside Complex (52-60-SP03228) December 29, 2009 Page two 4. All the Pool old piping shall be physically located, identified and pressure tested. 5. All recirculation lines to and from the pool shall be individually valved with proportional flow type valves in order to control the recirculation flow. ' 6. One diaper changing table shall be provided at each restroom. 7. The pool signs shall include the following: • No food or beverages in pool or on pool wet deck • No glass or animals in the fenced pool area (or 50 feet from unfenced pool) • Bathing Load: _ persons • Pool hours: _ a.m. to _ p.m. • Shower before entering ' Do not swallow the pool water Any revisions to the approved plans must be submitted to this office for approval. Prior to opening the pool for use an initial and annual operating permit must be obtained. Four (4) copies of the application form DH 916 must be completed, signed, and sealed as indicated, and submitted to this Department along with the appropriate fee(s). A final inspection must be scheduled with this office. To avoid a premature application, we request that you not send us the completed DH 916 form with signatures until the construction of the pool is complete and in accordance with approved plans and specifications and approved modifications. At the time of the inspection, the pool should be filled with water, the water be properly balanced, and all pumps and equipment be operational; i.e., the pool is finished, ready to operate, and ready for final inspection. Please be advised that if the pool is not ready to open at the time of our engineer's inspection, we may have no choice but to formally deny the application for an operating permit, which would then require the owner to submit a second complete form before we inspect the pool again. Operating permit applications must be accompanied by certification by the electrical contractor or electrical inspector that the electrical equipment wiring and grounding of the pool was performed in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. Your attention is specifically directed to the necessity of your monitoring of construction of the pool to ensure compliance with 1 ?pffpj ved plans. If you should have any questions about the review, please contact me at (727)538 7 by remail Jose_ Gonzales n doh.state.fl us , or at the letterhead address. Sincerelb? r tG N?? ? f 4s$ ••.y ? r Jose Azale Prof(= ` I En ineekicense 66 Envirr tal g pal Division ' Date: R ID Cc:: Mr. Ler?j tr I 4 ing & Project Manager, 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, Room 120; Clearwater, FL 33756. ??•'??'?!!!! File 1 1 1-1 J 1 1 J 1 1 t 1 MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE AGENDA CITY OF CLEARWATER MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR JANUARY 7, 2009 -10:00 AM 2400 HARN BLVD. POOL BUILDING CLEARWATER FLORIDA 1. Sign in Sheet 2. Introduction a) Pool Engineer b) Owner -Parks & Recreation Department 3. Scope of Work (See attachod sheets) 4. Consultant Comments 5- Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Cleanvater's Plan Room - website address: ww%v.mvCleanvater.com/ci ro ects or contact Jiffy Reprographics phone 727-422-7125 6. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. 7. Last day for submission of questions Friday, January 15, 2009 @ 10:00 AM Questions sent in writing to: Parks & Recreation Department Leroy Chin - Park, Planning & Project Manger E-mail: lero .chin mvclearwater.com Fax: 727-224-7101 Mail: P. O. Box 4736 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 8. Award Date by City Council Thursday, February 18, 2009 a) Contractor shall collect contracts from Engineering Dept. and have ten days to return signed contracts and performance bond for City Clerk to execute the contracts- 9. PreconstructionMeeting - to be determined 10- Notice to proceed tentative date Monday, March 1, 2010 11. Contract Period 60 calendar?day approx. Monday, May 10, 2010 completion date 12. Question and Answers a) Does the Owner have Builder's Risk and flood insurance in place for this project? If not, is it required and should the Contractor include in his proposal the cost for same? Answer: Contractor shall include Builder's Risk the project is not in a flood zone it is up to the contractor to determine if he needs flood insurance or not, b) Whose responsibility is it to provide signed/sealed plans for review by the State of Florida Dept. of Health? Answer: The drawings have been provisionally approved by the Pinellas County Health Department (PCHD) CENTRAX No. 52-60-SP00278and attached letters to the Engineer for the Special Purpose Pool Modification Plan Approval Letter & Main Pool Modification Plan Approval Letter is attached. The successful bidder will be required to perform all requirements as stated on the provisionally approval letters from PCHD for the both pools. The approved plans have been or will be submitted to the Clearwater Building Dept. for building permit and the successful bidder will be required to collect these plans. There are no fees for the building permit. c) Is the bid date January 21' or January 22 d? Answer: The bid date is Thursday, January 21. See attached revise advertisement Section 1 d) On page 22 of 46 of Section I11-General Conditions, under article 6.12 the second sentence reads "Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism. modification or operation by persons other than Contractor. Subcontractors or Suppliers-" This does not appear appropriate in that we cannot be 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 responsible for abuse and vandalism after we have turned the project over to the Owner. Please advise if this sentence is in error. Answer: The successful bidder is responsible for securing the site project area and is responsible for providing measures in prevention of vandalism of the site project areas turned over him by the owner. After the work is completed and the project is handed over with Health Department approval for operation and Certificate of Occupancy is provided by the Clearwater Building Department and project is closed out the Owner will be responsible for any vandalism from that point forward. Contractor is not responsible for vandalism during the warranty period. e) Will the project sign be required as stipulated in Section 1$ (see pg 40 and 41 of 46)? Answer: Yes the successful bidder will be required to provide a project sign at his expense. f) Will the `resident notification' flyers also be required as stipulated in Section 22 (pg 44 of 46)? Answer: Resident Notification will not be required for this project. g) Under `Scope of Work', clarification is required for item B_2 (see pg 1 of 126) for the Main Pool (Diving Well/Lap Pool). This sentence calls for "Pool gutter pipes shall be pressure tested for leaks and repair as necessary." It is impossible to determine the scope of work for this item for an all-inclusive proposal. The Contractors bidding this project will not be bidding apples-for-apples if we rely on assumptions. Please advise. Answer: This will be a requirement as also stated in the approval letter from the PCHD. h) In item B.13. (Main Pool), it calls for "Upon the removal of all tiles the Contractor shall sound the existing pool of hollow spots and remove these hollow areas." Again, it is impossible to determine the scope of work for this item for an all-inclusive proposal. The Contractors bidding this project will not be bidding apples-for-apples if we rely on assumptions. Please advise. Answer: This will be a requirement as also stated in the approval letter from the PCHD and can be quantified since the pool is determined. i) Under D.I at the Activity Pool, the requirement called out is for "The activity features shall be sent to the manufacturer for refurbishing by the Owner and reinstalled..." Who is responsible for the removal of the features, crating the features for shipment, cost of the freight to the manufacturer, the cost of the refurbishment plus freight for return to the jobsite and then reinstallation of the features? Answer: The pool contractor is required to remove the activity equipment and the owner will handle getting the equipment refurbished. The responsibility of the pool contractor to remove the equipment carefully not to damage during removal and reinstalling activity equipment. j) As a bidding contractor, we need to know the elevation of the groundwater and if there are any devices in place for the removal of the groundwater. Also, in Section 12 regarding the dewatering, the Contractor is required to submit for testing of the groundwater before it is discharged into the storm water system. What if the water samples do not meet the criteria for discharging onto the storm water system? This project has a duration of only 60 days. Please advise on all issues- Is it possible to place the responsibility of the groundwater dewatering in the hands of the Owner and this work can be preformed before the Contractor mobilizes? Answer: The pool should have drain plugs at the bottom of the main drains the contractor shall pull these plugs to allow the pool to fill the pool diving well. If there is no drain in the main drain the pool contractor shall core drill holes in the diving well to allow ground water to fill diving well. The contractor shall provide pumping & piping system necessary to remove ground water from diving well and construct pit with geo-tech fabric and straw bales to filter silt from ground water and runoff into existing storm sewer catch basins on the property. k) Please advise that the Contractor is responsible only for the layout and as-built survey for work performed by the Contractor and not responsible for layout and as-built survey for work performed by others. Answer: The pool contractor is only required to provide as-built information on his work and shall be red lined on a drawing prior to each request for payment and inspected by the owner of engineer. 1) Will the Contractor be responsible for the audio-video recording of the site for this project? Answer: Successful contractor is responsible for audio-video recording to clearly identifying the existing conditions during site hand over from the owner. m) We need to know the extent of the remedial work required of the two (2) dive stands as called out on Sheet 3 of 6. Answer: PCHD states certain conditions must be met in their provisional approval letter. The contractor shall inspect the equipment prior to submitting his proposal and shall be responsible for providing an operational diving board upon handing over the project back to the owner upon completion of the project n) We also need to know the extent of the work required for the two (2) main drains at the Main Pool as called out on Sheet 4 of 6. We need to know in detail what is required to get the main drains in ASME/ANSINGB compliance. Answer: The City of Clearwater has modified the main drains to meet the current ASME/ANSI/VGB compliance this pass swimming season. The contractor shall thoroughly inspect the main drains that they still meet the compliance prior to submitting his proposal. o) We need to know the spacing of the 43 `U' bars in the new pool coping (see Gutter Wall and Flo r Detail on Sheet 4 of 6). Answer: The spacing of the (43'U' bars shall be 1$-inches on centers. p) We need to know the colors selected for the 6x6 tiles at the pool beam. Answer: The contractor shall submit color tile samples to the owner and meet PCHD requirements, however a tile similar to existing will most likely be approved. q) Please confirm that all electrical including bonding/grounding is to be performed outside the scope of this Contractor- Answer: The owner is contemplating in providing a new concrete deck around the main pool and the special t 1 1 1 purpose pool. The owner has a blanket purchase order for concrete flatwork in place. Should the owner elect the install new pool deck electrical grounding will be required for the weld wire fabric and all metal components provided by the pool contractor will be electrically grounded as stated in the provisional approval letter by the PCHD. The pool contractor will be required to provide electrical grounding claps approved by governing electrical codes meeting PCHD criteria's. The owners electrical contractor will provide the conductor to ground the metal components according to the PCHD's directive. The pool contractor is to provide all pumps, motors, pool electrical components as shown on the drawings an mounted at the locations specified and including the strantrol system to their proper locations. The owners electrical contractor will make the necessary electrical connections. It will not be the responsibility of the owner's electrical contractor to provide any electrical components for the pool systems. The remote strantrol system in the life guard work station is the responsibility of the pool contractor. The owner will provide the electrical panel and service. r) Please confirm that all deck demo and new deck work (concrete work) is to be performed outside the scope of this Contractor. Answer: Yes deck demolition is not part of the scope of work and will be performed by others. s) The equipment list in the upper left hand corner of Sheet 5 of 6 calls for Vak Pak to furnish 1 chlorine feeder and 1 pH feeder and in the detail for the equipment pak, these feeders are shown to be installed within the `cabinet' (items 8 and 9). In the lower left hand corner of the `Special Purpose Pool Plumbing Plan' on the same sheet calls out `ELEVATION OF ELECTRICAL SERVICE' and shows a Strantrol feeder for both chlorine and pH AND a CES MR] ORP unit to be installed alongside the service meter and elec. panel. This info reiterates the info in the first sentence above except for the MR1 ORP unit. If a MR] ORP unit is required, why not have Vak Pak include it with their unit and all the equipment can be installed in their pak? Please advise. Further to this question, there is a note below this detail of the feeders and ORP unit that they are to be placed in a NEMA waterproof PVC cabinet. Again, it would make sense to place this equipment inside the equipment pak by Vak Pak. It would also simplify the electrical feed for the feeders and ORP unit as well as the electrical interlock if they were placed inside the Vak pak unit. Please advise. Answer the pool contractor shall provide VAC-PAK unit without cover and the chlorine feeders and the pH feeds shall be mounted next the electrical panel as shown on the detailed on sheet 5 of 6 Elevation of Electrical Service Detail. It is also noted the pool contractor shall provide NEMA water proof ultra violet resistant boxes for the strantrol 4 units and the Streiner pH feeders as well as the MRI ORP unit. t) Please confirm regards to the diving boards removal. How do you propose the diving board removal by the pool contractor if the pool deck is removed by others. Answer: The removal of the existing pool deck by others will be removed after the proposals have been received on the Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations and the pool contactor whom the contract award will have been identified. Should the decking around the pool be removed prior to the notice to proceed of Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations the city will contact the pool contractor to make arrangements with the pool contactor to agreed amount for its removal diving platforms. It is also noted the contractor shall refurbish the one meter diving platforms necessary, provide anchoring system & templates, and electrical bonding connection hardware and reinstall the diving platforms. 13. Tour of construction areas 14. Comments a) Prospective Bidders b) Pool Engineer c) Owner -Parks & Recreation Department 15. Adjourn Meeting at 11:45 AM, 1 ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS 1 1 PROJECT NO. 09-0000-PR CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.ipYClearwater.com/citvprojects, ON MONDAY DECEMBER 28, 2009, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for proposals consists of plumbing separation of the diving well/lap pool (main pool) from. special purpose pool. All plumbing associated with the special purpose pool shall be eliminated from the existing aquatic mechanical electrical room and the main pool; conversion of special pool froze gutter pool to a skimmer pool; installation of new filtration system, renovation of plumbing in pool mechanical room; resurfacing of lap/diving well pool, special purpose pool and activity pool and retiling of pools; construction period 60 calendar days from notice to proceed. MANDATORY Pre-Sid Conference for AT, all prospective bidders will be held on THURSDAY JANUR 7 2009 10:00 AM AQUATIC CENTER- 2400 HARN BLVD, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA. Representatives of the Owner and Pool Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 South Myrtle Ave., 3' Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY. JANUARY 22. 2009, and publicly opened and read. at that hour and place for M RNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENT P OL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0000-PR. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available only to contractors who have ten years of experience in municipal, commercial, and large pool construction and who provide a minimum of three references relating ' specifically to the type and size of work that shall be performed for this project with a pre- qualification amount of $150,000.00. Pool contractors must pre-qualify and any contractor not meeting these requirements will be disqualified and their bid will not be accepted. The pre- qualification application is included at the end of the technical specification section IV of the contract documents. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. ' A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. ' The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 I Sectionl.doc Page I of 1 8/27/2008 1 1 ?7' 1 t INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION II Table of Contents: SECTION 11 ................................................................................................................................... i 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2 S BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 6 CONTRACT TIME .......................................................................................................... 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................................................................... 3 10 SID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... S 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TALES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7 19 BID PROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 8 Sectionll.doe Revised: 7/1712008 t Section It - instructions to Bidders ' 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan ' Room - website address: www.Myclearwater.coni/ciqproje . Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, ' bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" ' package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City ;nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of ' incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so ' only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial ' resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 1.00 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City ' do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical ' conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in ' Sectionll.doe Page 1 of 9 Revised: 711712008 1 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon. information and data funiished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground. Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract .Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, mare or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, exploratio s, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work, is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for teniporaty construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. SectionlLdoc Page 2 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 ' Section II - Instructions to Bidders 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the ' City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND ' 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of ' a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed ' the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of ' the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after ' the Bid opening. com any a suret of Clearwater b v f the Cit d i th f d h ll b i h Bid B 5.3 y p y y ssue n e a or o on s a e T e qualified to do business, in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set ' forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ' 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. ' 6 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT R_1 The contract, if awarded, will 'be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or ' "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 if requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so ' reauested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an-experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the ' Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Sectionl.l..doc Page 3 of 9 Revised: 7/1712008 Section H - Instructions to Bidders Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 92 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Norm is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. i he Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each. section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested., the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall, produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed. below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"x11" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid, shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. Sectionll.doc Page 4 of 9 Revised: 7/1712008 1 t Section 11- Instructions to Bidders ' 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of ' Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for 1 receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for ' typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or ' modify any bid. ' 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds ' for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City ' believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the 1 City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. ' 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists ' among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the ]Von-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. ' 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ' 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically SectionIl.doe Page 5 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section II -- Instructions to Bidders stated otherwise in the Technical. Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV - Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III - General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE EIDSAIENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 1.7.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever t-wo or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or polo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. SectionII.doc Page 6 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 1 1 [1 I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Docunxents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed. time. 18.3 if the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or duo date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of 1 Section1l.doc Page 7 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section II -- Insirueti.ons to Bidders intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original fonnal protest letter and the response. from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.50-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (S WPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. Sectionll.doe Page 8of9 1 11 I Revised-. 7117/2008 Section II - Instructions to Bidders B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. ' NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best Management Practices. References EPA website J I Sectionll.doc Page 9 of 9 Revised: 7/17/200$ 1 SECTION 111 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: I DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... S 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................. 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT ................................................................................................................ 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................... 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ............................... ............................. ........ 5 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS ................................................................................................ 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 6 3.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................... 6 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................... 7 41 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ......................................................................................... 7 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ................... .................................................. 7 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................... 8 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 8 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND ............................... 8 5.2 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................... 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ......................................................... 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY .................................................... 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. 11 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... Tit 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 13 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES ..................................................................................................... 14 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS .................................................................................................... 15 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ........................................................................ ...... 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 15 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 16 6.8 PERMITS, ....................... .............................................................................................. 16 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ............................................................... 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................ 6.11 DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................. 17 Sectionl1l.doc i 9/9/2008 1 611.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFls, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ............. 611.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................................................ 611.3 CAD STANDARDS ........................................................................................ 611.4 DELIVERABLES: ......................................................................................... 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ................ 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ............................................................................. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION ............................... . ......................................................... ........... 17 ........... 18 ........... 20 ........... 22 ........... 23 ........... 23 7 OTHER WORK .............................................................................................................. 23 ' 7.1 7.2 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ COORDINATION ......................................................................................................... 23 24 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 24 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............................................. 24 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ........................ ...------- ......-........ ............. ,....,............... 24 1 9.2 9.3 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 25 25 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 25 9.5 9.6 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........................................................................................ LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................... 25 26 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 26 ' 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 27 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 27 ' 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT' ....................... 29 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 29 ' 12 13 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE 29 OF DEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................................................... 30 ' 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 30 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK . .................................................................................. .... 31 133 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK ........................................................................ 31 ' 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 31 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 32 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 32 ' 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 32 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 33 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 33 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE...-................ . ..... .. .. ........... . 34 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 34 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 35 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ...............•......................................------------.......-.....................---- 35 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 35 ' 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 36 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................................................................................ 36 1 SectionIl:l.doc ii 9/9/2008 1 1 u 1 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 37 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 37 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 37 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 38 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION .............................................................................................. 38 17 MISCELLANEOUS ....................................................................................................... 39 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 39 17.2 GIVING NOTICE .......................................................................................................... 39 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM .......... .................................................. .................................... 39 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 39 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 39 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION .................................................................................................... 39 18 PRO.IECT INFOR IA`I'ION SIGNS ............................................................................ 40 18.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ............................................................................................... 40 18.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................. 40 18.3 FIXED SIGN ............................... ................................................ ............. .................... 40 18.4 PORTABLE SIGNS ...................................................................................................... 40 18.5 SIGN COLORING ......................................................................................................... 40 18.6 SIGN PLACEMENT ..................................................................................................... 40 18.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 41 18.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN .......................................................................................... 41 19 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 41 19.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... .............. 41 19.2 PROCEDURE ................................................................................................................ 41 19.3 RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................... 42 20 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 44 21 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 44 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 44 23 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 45 24 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 46 1 Scctionlll.doc Ill 9/9!2008 1 Section 111- General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress ' or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer ' to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the ' prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bon(.lc ' Performanc e and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. ' City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Engineer and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of ' the contract documents. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid ' (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any ' Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. ' sectionIII'doe Page 1 of 46 9/9/200$ Section III - General Conditions Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule--C.PM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of t.venty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D. C. T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road. and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "instail", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting paeans examination of construction to Sectionlll.doc Page 2 of 46 9/9/2008 f' 1 1 Section III -General Conditions ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. ' Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom. will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. Person ' A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. ' Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. 11 1 Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (IVTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. .Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other Sectionlll.doc Page 3 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. , Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of ' materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor ' A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. , Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so , the, the `Fork (or specified pant) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms ' "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. , Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier , A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be ' responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Underground Facilities 1 All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires ma.-Tholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control. systems or water. t Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. , Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result ' of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. SectionIlI.doc Page 4 of 46 9/9/2098 1 ' Section III - General Conditions ' Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or ' responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or ' documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. ' 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ' 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by ' this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ' Engineer shall furnish to Contractor two (2) copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. ' 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT ' The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. ' 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements- Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or ' discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner or ' Engineer's Consultant; either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ' Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Engineer shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and r Seetionlll.doc Page 5 of 46 9/9/200$ Section III ... General Conditions others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and, this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner or the Engineer's Consultant shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as-built survey. The Owner or the Engineer's Consultant shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be schedule on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or, from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and. performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Engineer. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Engineer, or any of their agents or employees SectionIll..doc Page 6 of 46 919/2008 1 Section III -General Conditions ' from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Engineer. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be ' read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall ;forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. ' The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary Conditions, General Conditions, Drawings, Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications ' or Addenda the latest will govern. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 1 1 1 1 1 1 t If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Engineer for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 41 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and 5ectionIII.doc Page 7 of 46 9/912008 Section III General Conditions Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shatl not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (xv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC; UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL ]PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work, Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner or Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever ally reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a Owner survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of tune is prescribed by laws and. regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Sectionlll.doc Page 8 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of ' "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an ' agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet ' the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. ' 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the ' 'Work being performed and famished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability ' benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than ' Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or. by any other person for any other reason; (v) ' Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal ' refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each. other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the ' Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed ' SeetionIll.doc Page 9 of 46 9/912008 Section III-- General Conditions operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate SectionllI.doc Page 10 of 46 9/9/2008 1 1 Ci 1 1 11 Section III - General Conditions 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Pict: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Tabor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, S, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. 1 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the peals covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to SectionIIl.doc Page 11 of 46 9/9/2008 Section Ill - General Conditions the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and, (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and, direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in. accordance with the Contract. Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, except that Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner and Engineer, except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on. his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Engineer shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Engineer. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. sectionIII-doc Page 12 of 46 9/9/2008 ' Section III - Gencral Conditions Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. ' 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated ' in the Contract Documents, all. work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. ' Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, ' temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. ' All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and ' equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. 1 1 1 All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review Sectionlll.doc Page 13 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Engineer and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions, Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by ,'_,aws and Regulations, right-o way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant Sectionlll.doc Page 14 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III- Gencr°al Conditions because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify ' and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of ' waste materials, rubbish. and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from. and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction ' equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS `.1'he Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. ' 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. ' Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. e Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all tunes. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents Section l.doc Page 15 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.6 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in conmection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to_ (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Engineer may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work., such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which Sectionlll.doc Page 16 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III -General Conditions ' shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. ' The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility ' or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all personas and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his ' employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm; and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. ' Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or ' adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or Engineer, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to ' document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS ' 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ' Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, ' materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, ' Sectionlll.doc Page 17 of 46 9/9/2008 Section 11I - General Conditions Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shot) Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation. in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval:. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval. of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain. one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at. the job site. The Contractor shall mark and 5ectionlll,doc Page 18 of 46 9/9/2008 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III - General Conditions annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer and the Engineer's Consultant at all times during the progress of the Project. The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner Inspector for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marred-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As- Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 61G17--6.002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey-- a survey performed to obtain horizontal anchor vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. A-11 manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. Sectionlll.doc Page 19 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other infornnation. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. "The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in. direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the saine level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols 5ectionlll,doc Page 20 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section IIl - General Conditions TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2 Laver Namina Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. ' SectionIll.doc Page 21 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer_ All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer_ All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced 'on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tone Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas. Mahon mvcl.earwater.com _ 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final. acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any dcfects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period. of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (r) observations by Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Engineer, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. SectionllI.doc Page 22 of 46 9/9/2008 ' Section III -- General Conditions ' 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any ' disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION ' Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and ' against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, ' provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect. on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor ' shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such ' account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of ' the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, ' Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, ' directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. ' 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ' The Owner reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether ' related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. ' Sectionlll.doc Page 23 of 46 9/9!2008 Section III-General Conditions The Owner may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. At no time will the Owner let another contract to a different Contractor to perform work at the same site during the duration of the original contract. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. S OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Engineer. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of co»struction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 ENGINEER"S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and the responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. SectionllLdoc Page 24 of 46 919/2008 1 1 Section III - General Conditions 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise) as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Projcct that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS ' In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Engineer's ' authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 1 1 1 1 1 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty (30) days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). Engineer will render a forma! decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Engineer's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Engineer's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Sectionlll:.doc Page 25 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written, notice of intention to appeal from Engineer's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Engineer within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with'respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capaOwner. The rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER°S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with Sectionlll.doc rage 26 of 46 9/9/200$ ' Section III -- General Conditions 1 the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the 1 Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. ' Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments ' recommended by Engineer covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective ' Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; ' changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; ' provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable ' Laves and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract ' Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. I I CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ' 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) ' payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written ' Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start ' of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (64) days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not SectionJlLdoc Page 27 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be detern-ined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum. (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner of Clearwater, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the Owner of Clearwater shall pay.ror directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen., for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the Owner of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work perforxed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item. 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (1.0%) shall be added to the costs of Stem 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. SectimIll.doc Page 28 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III - General Conditions 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer ' to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. ' 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK [-1 1? Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial. Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with 5ectionlll.doc Page 29 of 46 9/9/2008 Section Ill - Guieral Conditions supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All. claims for adjustment in. the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Engineer. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in. the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION' Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected., tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer or Engineer's Consultants the required certificates of inspection or approval.. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Sectionill.doc Page 30 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III - General Conditions ' Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be ' incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by ' Contractor without written. concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. ' 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by ' Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose or ' otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages ' caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor ' shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or ' extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time, ' 13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed ' Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Engineer to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to ' exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Engineer stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. ' 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ' If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all ' SectionITI.doc Page 31 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III- General Conditions claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If. Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.5 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owenr's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective `,Fork (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work.; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected. Work as required by Engineer in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under Sectionlll.doc Page 32 of 46 9/9/2008 1 11 1 Section III - General Conditions this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Engineer and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work (including as-built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement) completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with Section 111, Article 6.11.2 of these Specifications. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. Section.lll.doc Page 33 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and fumisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the fi,rtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owenr's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is funlished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS Engineer will within twenty (20) days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to the Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Engineer because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed. in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Engineer, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the SectionIll.doc Page 34 of 46 9/9/2008 1 11 Section III - General Conditions amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final. Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part. of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the `,fork to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Engineer will produce a final punch list and assign a date for this work to be completed. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Engineer and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (I) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish. SectionllI.doc Page 35 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III. - General Conditions receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINIAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Engineer so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Engineer. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to coniply with. the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. Sectionlll.doc Page 36 of 46 9/912008 1 [1 ' Section III - General Conditions ' 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract ' Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, ' failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; ' if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract ' Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise ' than as herein specified, or at any time Engineer certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. ' The Owner may, after giving Contractor. (and the surety, if any), seven days' written. notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude ' Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has ' paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and ' damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. ' If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not ' affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. ' SectionIII.doc Page 37 o£96 9/9/2008 Section III-General Conditions Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor, Engineer and Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Engineer, and provided the Owner or Engineer does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Engineer stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim raider paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 5ectionl1l.doe Page 38 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III - General Conditions ' 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Engineer subject to the approval of Owner. ' 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual. or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by ' registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or ' agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the ' provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ' Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ' The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assigriment. ' 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION ' Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Engineering 1 Department. 1 SectionlIl.doc Page 39 of 46 9/9/2008 Ll Section III - General Conditions 18 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 18.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. 18.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be lump sum for the entire project. The number of and type of signs will be stated in the Scopc of the Work section of the contract documents. Lump sum item will be included in the bid proposal for signs. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruetion conference. 18.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of three pressure treated 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval.. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 18.4 PORT ABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"00") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminu3rA, 0.080- inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 18.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. 18.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations Sectionlll.doc Page 40 of 46 9/912008 Section III -- Genera! Conditions of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. ' 18.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. 18.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN: PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) A OWNER OF CLEARWATER {DEPARTMENT'S NAME) PROJECT [l fl CONTRACTOR: OWNER : COIMPEETI.ON SCHEDULE: FUNDING PROVIDED BY- 19 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION 19.1 GENERAL The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's ' documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other ' applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of ' construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. ' 19.2 PROCEDURE The Contractor and the Owner, prior to the ordering of any materials, must complete the ' "Addendum to Agreement for Construction" form for this project. Other documents to be included in this procedure are Attachment "A" (Owner/Contractor document for Owner- Furnished Materials); Attachment "B" (Contractor/Sub-Contractor document for Owner- ' SectionllI.doc Page 41 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III. - General Conditions Furnished Materials); Attachment "C" (Contractor/Sub-Contractor document for Owner- Furnished Materials); Attachment "D" (Procedure for Generating Sub-Contractor Direct Purchase Orders for Sales Tax Credits); Procedures for Sales Tax Savings, Requests to Requisition and Receiving/Invoice document; and Request to Requisition Standard Purchase Order form. Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the "Addendum to Agreement for Construction", and the Contractor shall submit two (2) original copies of the Addendum to the Owner. Attachment "B", "C", and "D" relate to Owner- Furnished Materials that are part of the Subcontractor's work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each Subcontractor responsible for materials as part of the Subcontractor's work. Attachments lettered "A", "B", and "C", included (as amended by notations thereon) and incorporated within the contract documents shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-Contractors and the terms thereof shall govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by Owner plus the normally applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as bid by the Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be used. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's authorization process, as outlined in attachment "D". The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, the Owner acknowledges that the Contractor's Sub-Contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials directly, without the Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of sales tax. 19.3 RESPONSIBILITIES The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and materials for consideration as Owner-Furnished materials and shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the virvTier in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the Owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As Owner-burnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by SectionULdoc Page 42 of 46 9/9/2008 ' Section III - General Condhidns documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The ' Contractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and ' determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non-conformities in ' Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those ' materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have ' known by performance of an inspection, the Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. ' The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered ' into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials, which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. ' The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate ' supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished ' Materials. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to ' sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of.Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify Owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. ' On a monthly basis, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during the month for use by the Contractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon ' Contractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within thirty (30) days of receipt of ' said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders, which will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required SectionIlI.doc Page 43 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III -- General Conditions by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications. 20 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 21 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($4$0.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year frorn the date of final. acceptance. 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved. by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall. be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall. be posted to residences and businesses directly affected 9ectionIII.doc Page 44 of 46 9/9/2008 1 [1 t 1 1 I Section. III - General Conditions ' by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private ' property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen 1 [1 inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a nonspecific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. ,Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number ' 23 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by ' the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. SectionIILdoc Page 45 of 46 9/9/200$ Section III - General Conditions ' 24 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ' The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, "Technical ' Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 1 11 1 1 Sectionlll,doc Page 46 of 46 9/9/2008 ' SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table of Contents: 1 SCOPE OF WORK ...........................................................................................................1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ . 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST ................................................................................. . 3 2 FIELD ENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 6 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR .............. . 6 2-1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS ............................................................................ . 6 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ...................................................................................................... . 6 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................ . 6 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS .............................................................................................. . 6 31 REFERENCE STANDARDS ........................................................................................ . 7 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS .......................................................................... . 7 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ............................................................... . S 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK ......................................................... . 8 6 CONCRETE ..................................................................................................................... .9 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR. CONCRETE WORK ........................................ 10 7.1 EXCAVATION .............................................................................................................. 10 7.2 FORMS ......................................................................................................................... 10 B REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................................... 10 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ....................................................................................•............ 10 9 OBSTRUCTIONS ........................................................................................................... 10 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT ........................................................................................... 1.1. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS ................................................................. 11 12 DEWATERING ...............................................................................................•............... 12 12.1 GENERAL.. . ................................................................................................................. 12 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 12 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 12 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCIL4RGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY ........................... 12 13 SANITARY MANHOLES .............................................................................................. 15 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 15 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 15 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 16 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 16 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 16 ScctionTVAoc i 9/9/2 008 1 1 11 1 1 1 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 16 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 16 14 BACKFILL ...................................................................................................................... 17 1.5 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC ........................................................................................ 17 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 17 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 17 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 17 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 17 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 18 18 UNDERDRAINS ............................................................................................................. 18 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 18 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 18 19 STORM SEWERS .......................................................................................................... 18 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION... .......................................... ........................................... 19 19.2 TESTING ...... ............................. ................................................................................... 19 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 19 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 20 20.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 20 20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ....................................................................................... 20 20.1.2 FORCEMAINPIPE .................................. ........................ ---- .................. 20 20.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................... ............................... 20 20.2.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ..---- .... ................... --................... ........ ...................... 20 20.2.2 FORCEMAINPIPE .................................................................................. .. ....... 21 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 21 20.4 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 21 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITYSEWERS ........................................................................ 21 20.4.2 TESTINGOFFORCEMAINS........................ . .. .. ... .................................... 21 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................ ................................ 22 20.5..1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ............ ---.............................. ......................... ................ 22 20.5.2 FORCEMAINPIPE .................................................... ---- ................................ 22 21 DRAINAGE ..................................................................................................................... 22 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE .......................................................................... 22 22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 22 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 24 22,1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE... ........... ................. 24 22.2 SUBGRADE ................................................................................................................. 24 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 24 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ 25 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 25 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 25 Sectioxil.V.doc ii 9/9/2008 1 1 ' 23. l.1 AGGREGATE .......... ........ . ................................................................................... 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ............................................................................... . . 25 ..25 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & ' QUALITY ASSURANCE .....................................................................----................. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................. .. 25 .. 26 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................. .. 26 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION ............................................................ .. 27 .. 27 23.6.1 CRACKS .............................................................................................................. ..27 ' 23.6 POTHOLES .......................................................................................................... 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES . ..27 . 27 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... .. 28 ' 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 29 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ..................•---......................................................... ..... 29 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... .. 29 ' 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE' UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 29 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. a0 ' 25.1 IRRIGATION ................................................................................................................ 30 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................30 25.1.2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................ ..31 ' 25.1.3 EXECUTION. ......................•--.._....................................................................-.......36 25.2 LANDSCAPE. .39 25.2.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... ..39 ' 25.2.2 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................ 25.2.3 EXECUTION ...................................................................................................... .. 4 ..47 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 54 ' 26.1 INTENT ..................................................................................................................... ... 54 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ..................... ... 54 ' 26.3 MATERIALS.. .......................................................................... ................... ............ 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................ ... 54 ... 55 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ............................................. ' 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION'..... .............................................................................--.--... 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION .................................................................................. ... 56 ... 56 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................... ... 56 ' 26.9 PAYMENT .....................................•--.................................._....._............------------.--..--- 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS- ..................................................................................... .-- 56 ... 56 ' 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................... 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT...... ........................................................................................ ... 57 ... 57 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ............................. ... 57 ' 29 CONCRETE CURBS .................................................................................................. ... 57 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................•--............................................... ... 57 ' 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........................................' 57 ........................................................ 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS . 58 ' Section.IV,doc iii 9/9/2008 1 ' 30.1 30.2 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS .......................................................................................... CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ......................................................................................... 58 58 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 58 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 31 SODDING ..................................... . 58 58 32 33 SEEDING ......................................................................................................................... STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM 59 STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 59 ' 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 59 33.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 60 ' 33.3 34 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 60 60 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 60 36 STREET SIGNS ........ :...................................................................................................... 60 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 61 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................ 61 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ................................................... 61 ' 37.3 37.4 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................... 61 61 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 61 ' 37.6 37.7 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 61 62 37.8 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 62 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL .................................................................................................... 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ................................................................................................... 62 62 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................................................... 62 ' 3712 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ................................................................................... 62 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 63 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 63 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 63 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 63 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ....................................................................... . 63 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ...................................................................................... . 63 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ..................... . 64 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS ................................................................... . 64 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION- .................................................... . 64 38.9 MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................ . 64 38.1 0 COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................................ .64 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................ . 67 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE ................... . 67 ' 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES ...................................................................................................... . 67 1 5ectionivAoc iv 9/9/2008 1 41.1 SCOPE ....................... .......................... .......... ................... ......................... ................... 67 41.2 MATERIALS ............................................................................................. ................... 68 41.2.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................... ................... 68 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS .................................................. ...... . ............ 68 41.2.3 GATE VALVES ................................................................................... ................... 70 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES ................................................................................... ................... 70 41.2.5 HYDRANTS ........................................................................................ ...................70 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES .......................................................................... ................... 72 41.2.7 TESTS INSPECTIONAND REPAIRS ............................................... ................... 72 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ............................................................. ................... 72 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES .......................................................................... ................... 73 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ................................................................... ................... 73 41.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................... ....................73 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING .................................................................... ................... 73 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING .................................................................................... ................... 73 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS ...................... ................... 75 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................ .................. 75 41.4 TESTS ....................................................................................................... ....................76 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS. ........................... ......................................... ............. ..... 76 41.4.2 NOTICE OFTEST ............................................................................. ................... 76 41.5 STERILIZATION ..................................................................................... ................... 76 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT ....................................................................... ................... 76 41.5.2 FL U,SHING SYSTEM ......................................................................... ................... 76 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE ....................................................... ...................7d 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ....................................................... ....................77 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS ........................................................................... ................... 77 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... .................... 77 41.6.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................... .................... 77 41.62 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS.. ......... ........................... .................... 78 41.6.3 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS ............................................... .................... 78 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ .................... 78 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ................................... .................... 78 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 79 43 'T'ENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 79 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ............................................................................... ........... 79 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS... ..................................... ..... . .......................... .......... ........... 79 43.1.2 BASE COURSE .......................................................................................... ........... 79 43.1.3 PRIME COAT .......................................... . . ................................................ ........... 79 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE ................................................................................. ........... 79 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE .................................................................................. ..... ..... 79 43.1.6 COLOR COAT ........................................................................................... ........... 80 43.2 CL AY TENNIS COURTS ................................................................................. ........... 81 43.2.1 GENERAL......... ................. ........................ I ...................... - ... .................. ........... 81 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION ................................................................................. ........... 82 43.2.3 SLOPE... ............. I I ... I I ..... ................ I ...... .... .................. I I ....... ......... I .......... ......... 1.82 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................ ........... 83 SectionIV.doc v 9/9/2008 1 1 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING .............................................................. ......................... 83 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE .................................................................... ......................... 83 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER .......................................................................... ......................... 83 43.2.8 FENCING .................................................................................... ......................... 84 412.9 WINDSCREENS ........................................................................... .........................84 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT ............................................................. ... ......................... 84 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE .................................................................. ......................... 86 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable). ........................................................ ......................... 86 43.2.13 CONCRETE ................................................................................. .........................86 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING ........................ ......................... 86 43.2.15 WATER COOLER ......................................................................... ......................... 87 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION ..................................................................... .........................87 43.2.17 WARRANTY .................................................................................. .........................87 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 88 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 88 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 88 44.2.1 WORK ZONE .S'AFETY ......................................................................................... 88 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ....................................................................... 89 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ................................................................................................... 89 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS .............. . . . 89 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERJALS ......................................................... 8.9 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ............................................................................................. 89 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................... 89 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 90 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 90 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 90 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .............................................................................. 90 45.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 90 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTORANSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 91. 45.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 91 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 91 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 92 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 92 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 92 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 92 45.9 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................... 92 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 93 46.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 93 461.1 PIPEAND FITTINGS ........................................................................................... 93 461.2 QUA_LITYCONTROL ........................................................................................... 93 461.3 SAMPLES. ................................ - ...... ........................... .................... -- .......... , ..... 93 46.1.4 REJECTION....... ........ ........................... ..................................................... ---- 93 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 93 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................................................. 94 46 3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE ........................................................................................... 94 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS.. ...... --- ....................................... ............. 94 1 SectionlV.doc vi 9/9/2008 1 463.3 PIPE JOINING ......................................................... ............................................ 94 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ................................. ........................... ............... 94 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ............................................ ............................................ 94 464.1 PIPE REQ UIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS .......... ............................................ 94 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ............................... .......... .................................. 94 464.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS .............. .......................... ............ 95 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER .................................... ............................................ 95 464.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES .......................... ............................................ 95 464.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED .... ... -- ....................... ............. 95 46.4.7 BACKFILLING ......................................................... ............................................96 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR ......................................................... ............................................ 96 46 4 9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS . ........................................ 96 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ...................... 96 47.1 SCOPE ........................ ......................... .................................................... •-•........... ---.96 47.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 96 47.3 PIPE .............................................................................................................................. 96 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ..................... ...... .............. ....................................... ....................... 97 47.5 FITTINGS .................................................................................... ................................ 97 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 97 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 97 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................ . 97 483 COMPOSITION .......................................................................................................... . 97 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. . 98 48.5 MATERIALS ............................................................................................................... . 98 48.6 WATER ........................................................................................................................ . 98 48.7 REINFORCEMENT .................................................................................................... .98 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ...................................................................................... . 98 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ........................................................................................ . 99 48.10 PROPORTIONING ...................................................................................................... .99 48.11 MIXING, ............................... ...................................................................................... .99 48.12 APPLICATION ............................................................................................................ .99 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ....................................................................................... 100 48.14 SURFACE FINISH ..................................................................................................... 100 48.15 CURING ..................................................................................................................... 100 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ................................................................... 100 48.17 INSPECTION...... ....................................................................................................... 101 48.18 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 101 49 S ANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ......................... 102 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ............................................................................................... 102 49.2 PAYMENT .................................................................................................................. 102 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS .......................................................................... 102 49.3.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 102 49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION .................................................................. 103 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .............................................. 103 49.4.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 104 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ....................................... ............................................ 104 SectionIV.doc vii 9/9/2008 1 49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... 104 49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ 104 49.8 WATER ....................................................................................................................... 105 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 105 49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 105 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION... .................................................................... 105 49.11.1 PREPARATION ...........................:....................................................................... 105 49.11.2 MIXING. - ............................................................................................................. 106 49.113 SPRAYING .......................................................................................................... 106 ................................... 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ....................... .......... 106 49.11.5 CURING .............................................................................................................. 106 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................. . .... 107 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 107 49.12.1 SCOPE ............................ .................................................................................. 107 49.12.2 MATERI.4LS .................................................................................._-----..------....... 107 49.12.3 INSTA LLA TION AND EXEC UTION .................................................................. 109 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS .......................................................................... .111 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................ .111 51.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ .111 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ..................................................................................... .112 51.2.1 ASPHALT ............................................................................................................ .112 51.2.2 CONCRETE ........................................................................................................ .112 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX ........................................................................... .112 5133 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ......................................................... .112 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE .......................................................... .113 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .................................................................................... .113 51.6 PLAYING LINES ....................................................................................................... .113 51.7 GENERAL.... ......... ........ .......... __ ................................................. ........................... . 113 51.8 LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................ .11.3 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ......................... .114 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ................................................................................. .114 53.1 MATERIAL ....................................................................................................... ........ .114 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO .MATTRESS MATERIAL .................................................. .114 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL :.............................................. .116 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE... .... .................. ....................................... ......... _ ................ . 117 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ....................................................................................... .117 53.2 PERFORMANCE ....................................................................................................... .117 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... .118 54.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ .118 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................................................................................ .118 54.3 WORK METHODS .................................................................................................... .119 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ....................................................................... .119 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ........................................................................... .119 54.4 LITTER ........................... ............................................................................................ . 119 54.5 VISUAL CHECK ....................................................................................................... .119 SecbOnMdoc viii 9/9/2008 1 1 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING ........................................................... 119 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)...... 119 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL ................................................................................................... 119 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................................ 120 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ 120 5411 PLANT FERTILIZATION .......................................................................................... 120 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... 120 54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................................................................................... 120 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 120 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ..................................................... 120 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 120 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 121 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 121 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 121 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. 121 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 121 55 MILLING OPERATIONS ........................................................................................... 122 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ...................................... 122 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 122 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................. 123 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 123 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. 123 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 123 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................ 123 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 124 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 124 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........................................................................................ ..... 124 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 124 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 124 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 124 57 RIPRAP .......................... ...........................................................................124 ........................................................................... 124 ........................................................................... 125 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.... 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............... 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 125 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL., ........................................................................................... 125 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 125 ' 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 125 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 126 60 SIGNING AND MARKING ......................................................................................... 126 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 126 ' 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING .............................................................................................. 1.26 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ....................................................... 126 1 SectionlV.doc ix 9/9/2(X)8 1 62 TREE PROTECTION ....::•:' .. ................. ..... ............;.......:..:.. .. ...........::... .....:;.... .........127 62.1 TREE BARRICADES . . 127 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... 127 ' 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 128 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 129 ' 63.1 63.2 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 129 129 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 129 ' 63.4 63.5 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... INTERACTIVE FORMS ........................................................................................ 130 130 63.6 POSTING .................................................................................................................... 130 ' 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 130 ' FLORIDA BUILDING CODE CHAPTER 64E-9 PUBLIC SWIMMING POOLS AND BATHING PLACES. ............. ..-pages 1-32 PINELLAS COUNTY HEALTH DEPARTMENT - OFFICE OF ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH SERVICES -- PUBLIC SWIMMING POOL RENOVATION SURVEY ' MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER LAP/DIVING WELL POOL & SPECIAL PURPOSE POOL. .......................... ........ paSes 1-2 QUALIFICATION APPLICATION OF PROSPECTIVE BIDDER CITY OF CLEAR-WATER CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS .......................................pages I-6 t SectionIV.doc x 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications ' 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ' Project Name: Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations Project Number: 09-0000-PR ' Scope of Work: A. General Nol 1 1 I 1. The pool contactor shall contact City of Clearwater Solid Waste for roll off in disposal of waste from this project. 2. The pool contractor shall review check list from the Pinellas County Health Department for modifications of the pools at the Momingside Aquatic Complex and perform all items on the check list for all three pools, lap diving pool, special purpose pool. The pool renovations shall be performed according to the Florida Building Code Chapter 64E-9 Public Swimming Pools And Bathing Places attached in this document. The pool contractor shall note items not shown on the drawings or in this scope of work does not constitute the pool contractor to not perform the renovations and required work as based in Florida Building Code Chapter 64E-9 Public Swimming Pools And Bathing Places. 3. The pool contractor is required to obtaining the building permit from the City of Clearwater - Planning & Development Services Department. 't'here is no fee for this permit. The pool contractor is required call in all inspections. 4. The pool contractor is required to obtain final inspection and pool operation from Pinellas County Health Department prior to close out of the project. 5. Pool contractor is required to balance pool chemical for 5 days prior to turnover of the project to the owner. The owner will provide all chemicals for this balancing procedure. 6. The owner will provide electricity and water for the construction of this project. 7. The pool contractor shall be required to provide his own sanitation for his employees. 8. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amours and submitted at the pre- construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilizes the standard AlA form in making his application for payment on or prior to the 25m of every month. This application shall be submitted to die engineer for his review and approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with each payment. 9. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work and nninor slid major milestones for die project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be provided at the pre-construction meeting as well as a list of sub-contractors with contact person, addresses, telephonc/cell/fax nurnbers, and a-mail addresses. 10. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a list of shop drawing as well as list of material submittals for review by the engineer and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the engineer as the required submittal list. 11. The owner shall require 2 copies of the each shop drawing and material submittal and shall be maintained by the contractor in separate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as pan of die close out materials. Also included is a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and a-mail addresses. 12. Submittals shall be sent directly to the architect, for his review and one copy seat to tite owner project manager for Pool Staff Review at the same time they are sent to the engineer. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pre-construction meeting. 11 The contractor shall note the contract duration is 60 calendar days for corutnrction of this project from notice to proceed. No additional days will be allowed. 14. Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates shall be determined at the pre- construction meeting. 15. The contractor shall police the site of any construction debris and any trash can for his employees on a daily steals and breaks at the job site. In no case shall trash from meals or breaks left on the construction site at the end of the day's work. B. Divine Well Lao Pool 1. Work. consists of separation plumbing of the diving well and lap pool (main pool) from special purpose pool. All plumbing associated with the special purpose pool shall be eliminated from the existing pool mechanical electrical room. Existing pool mechanical/electrical room will continue operating the main pool. The main pool plumbing shall remain. Contractor shall review drawing sheet 3 of 10 piping schematic and shall disconnect pipe within 5 feet of main pool, special purpose pool and aquatic mechanical room. Contractor shall cut and remove 6'x8' concrete slab outside the mechanical room and remove piping from the aquatic mechanical room at this location. All piping to be abandon shall be capped, 2. Pool gutter pipes shall be pressure tested for leaks and repair as necessary. Replace all gutter grates and install new Hayward 9PI019 socket fittings after replacement gutter system piping the entire system shall be re-pressure tested. 3. The main pool gutter perimeter shall be reconstructed and made level Sectionl,V.doc Page 1 of 126 9/9/200$ 1 Section IV -'T'echnical Specifications Scope or Work Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations Continued... 4. All existing mosaic tiles in gutter shall be removed, lane lines, targets and other tiles of the entire pool shall be removed surfaces to be prepared to receive new tiles or exposed aggregate. The pool contractor shall note the gutter surface will not have mosaic tiles reinstalled and diving well will not receive new lap lane tiles or targets, these areas shall receive new pool exposed aggregate surfacing Marquis or alternate Hydra= as specified in the bill of quantities no substitution will be allowed. If the owner selects the Hydrazzo surfacing the contractor must provide a 10 year warranty for the Hydrazzo surfacing. All new tiles shall be set with thin set for new tiles. 5. Replace dive markers and depth markers shall be 25 feet on center, 6, All steps of main pool shall rebuilt as required current health department codes. 7. Existing recess step sections shall be filled in and prepared to receive exposed aggregate surface- 8. Install new stainless steel cross brace ladders and bronze anchors shall be installed 75 feet on renter. 9. Install new lap lane recess cup anchors at both ends of lap lane lines. Lap lane ropes will be provided by the owner. 10. Install new cup anchor; for safety line at location separation of diving well from lap pool. 1.1. Remove dump slide, chain link fence and pluming for the dump slide. The contractor shall depose of all items removed from the site and disposed of properly. 12. Main pool beam shall be constructed according to the detail, apply bonding agent and patch area hydraulic non-shrink cement concrete. Entire bond beam shall have medium broom finish perpendicular to the pool. 13. Upon removal of all tiles of the main pool the contractor shall sound existing pool surface of hollow spot and remove theses hollow areas. This sounding shall be for die entire main pool. After sounding the main pool the entire surface of the main pool shall be sand blasted to remove all loose existing exposed aggregate surfaces. The contractor shall apply bonding agent compatible and approved by the exposed aggregate finish manufacture prior to applying exposed aggregate surfaces. 14. Install new stainless steel heavy duty backstroke post and bronze anchors and shall be electrically bonded to the pool system. 15. All new and existing metal components shall be electrical, grounding: wiring and bonding to comply with Chapter 27, Florida Building Code FBC2007, Chapter 27 Electrical, NEC Section 690.26(C). No overhead power with in 10 feet of pools. Electrician must certify compliance to engineer - (See bonding not SE2836,6-20-07) For bonding and grounding system for swimming pools, the use of an underground bonding conductor made of 48 AWG..Bare Solid copper wire buried to a minimum of 4 inches to 6 inches below stab-grade, and 18 to 24 inches from inside wall of a swimming pool or spa, is deemed a. permissible alternative or equivalent to compliance with S680.26(C) of the National Electrical Code. The pool contractor is required to provide access to the component installed by pool contractor for electrical contractor to electrically bond all metal components. The pool contractor will be required to coordinate and cut concrete slabs for electrician to install wiring conductors to electrically bond all metal components for the pool works of the Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations. C. Special Purpose Pgol, 1. The special purpose pool shall be converted into a skimmer pool. The perimeter of the special purpose pool beam gutter system plumbing shall be reconstructed into a skimmer pool system. New steps shall be constructed on the deep end of die pool as shown on die drawings. 2. A new VAK-PAK filtration system shall be provided for the special purpose pool see sheet 5 of 6 for location and additional information. 3. Pool contractor shall be required to pour concrete slab 2 feet beyond the outside edge of the VAK-PAK filtration system. And shall be 6" thick at 3,000 psi with commercial fiber mesh. 4. The existing piping of the special purpose pool shall be located The main drain of the special purpose pool shall be relocated to accommodate new stair steps. Return line shall be utilized an.tl connected to the VAC I'AK filtration system. See plan for piping system, As indicated previously the special purpose pool is to be disconnect from the main pool filtration system and all plumbing disconnected shatl be capped. 5. Probe cleaner, strantrols and feeders are to be provided by the pool contractor, made operational and installed in a weatherproof' PVC box which is ultraviolet resistance. Warning system of the strantrols system mounted in the pool reception desk area for monitoring by the pool life guards. 6. All new piping shall be installed a minimum of 30 inches below finished grade. All piping shell be pressure tested to 100 psi for 24 hours. The pool contactor shall notify the engineer when this test is performed. 7. Sounding shall be preformed for the entire special purpose pool and hollow spots shall be removed. After sounding the pool the entire surface of the special purpose pool shall be sand blasted to remove all loose existing exposed aggregate surfaces The contractor shall apply bonding agent compatible and approved by the exposed aggregate fan'sh manufacture prior to applying exposed aggregate surfaces. 9. All existing tiles shall be removed and surface prepared to receive new tilts. 9. Replace dive markers and depth markers shall be 25 feet on center. 10. All steps ofspecial purpose pool shall rebuilt as required current health department codes- 11. All new hand rails shall be heavy duty stainless steel with bronze anchors and provisions shall be made to have the electrically grounded see note 15 above Lap Pool Diving Well scope of work. 5ectionIV.doc Page 2 of 126 9/9/2008 1 1 1 1 [l 1 1 1 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications Scope of Work Morningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations Continued... D. Activity Pool 1. Activity pool shall have all play activity feature items removed except for palms bases, Palm bases shall be inspected to determine if required for removal and refinishing or refinishing in place. The activity features shall be sent to manufacture for refurbishing by the owner and reinstalled after the pool has been or prior to installation of specified exposed aggregate surface. Al] exposed bolts and other protruding items to be covered with exposed aggegate surface. 2. All existing tiles shall be inspected for damage tiles. Damaged tiles to be removed and prepared surfaces to receive new tiles. 3. Sounding shall be preformed for the entire activity pool and hollow spots shall be removed. After sounding the pool the entire surface of the training pool shall be sand blasted to remove all loose existing exposed aggregate surfaces. The contractor shall apply bonding agent compatible and approved by the exposed aggregate finish manufacture prior to applying exposed aggregate surfaces. The contractor shall inspect the filtration system of the activity pool filtration system and shall repair as necessary and shall provide a one year warranty operational system at final handover of the project to the owner. E. Exist' Mechanical Electrical Room I. The contractor shall review Modification of Pool Equipment sheet 6 of 6 of photos showing modifications of equipment in the existing mechanical-electrical room. The pool contractor is required to make these modifications as shown on this drawing. 2. The contractor shall remove concrete slab, excavate to depth of pool piping, disconnect piping of training pool and dump slide and cap piping to be abandoned. The abandoned piping and valves shall be removed from the wall and in the pump room. The wall shall be patched with high strength hydraulic concrete allowed to cure and the outside wall shall have a bituminous mastic applied for water proofing the wall. The excavations shall be filled and compacted to sub-grade of the concrete slab. Owner will pour 4" thick concrete exposed aggregate slab with 3,000 psi concrete in 28 days with commercial fiber mesh. 3. The pool contractor shall inspect all valves and remove all piping related to the disconnection of the special purpose pool from the main pool. 4. Contractor shall dismantle filter tank pit and resurface filter tank and reinstall filter tank elements upon completion of resurfacing exposed aggregate surface of filter task pit. P. Sco g of Work Not Included and PeKfUlDgAyravided by the Owner 1. Removal of existing site furnishing, benches, picnic tables, bleachers shade canopy and netting. 2. Removal of concrete pool deck siibs. 3. Electrical service, electrical panel, electrical bonding 4. Installation of new shade canopies 5. New concrete decks f;. New fencing 7. Water 8, Electricity SectioniV.doc 60 Consecutive Calendar Days From Notice to Proceed Contract Period: Rxty Page 3 of 126 9/92008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: M.orningside Aquatic Center Pool Renovations Project Number: 09-0000-PR The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below- 1 Q Scope Of Work 2.1 ? Line and. Grade Shall Be Performed B The Contractor _ 2.2 E] I Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The City 3 Q Definition Of Terms 4 Q Order And Location Of The Work 5 Q Excavation For Underground Work fi Concrete 7 ? Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work w 8 Reinforcement 9 ? Obstructions 10 Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement I I Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 ? Dewaterin 13 Sanitary Manholes 14 Q Backfill 15 L1 I Street Crossings, Etc. 16 _ _ Raisin,* Or Lowering Of Sanity Sewer, Storm Draina a Structures 17 ? Unsuitable Material Removal 18 Underdrains 10 Storm Sewers _ 20 ? Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 Drainage 22 EMI Roadway Base And. Sub grade 23 ? Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ? Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt _ 25 El I General Planting Specifications 26 ? Hd e Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 Plant Mix Driveways 2R ? Reporting Of TonnMe Of Recycled Materials 29 Concrete Curbs 30 ? Concrete Sidewalks And Drivewa s 31. Sodding _ 32 ? Seeding. 33 ? Storm Manholes Inlets, Catch. Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 Material Used _ 35 Q Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 Street Signs 37 F] I Au.dio/Video Recording Of Work Areas 38 Q Erosion And. Siltation Control 39 Utility Tie In Location Marking 40 ? Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 Potable Watermains, Reclaimed Watermain•s and A urtenances 42 Gas System Specifications 43 Tennis Courts 44 Work Zone Traffic Control 45 El I Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining SectionIV.doc Page 4 of 126 9/9/2008 1 J i] 11 fl 1 1 f] Section '1V - Technical Specifications 46 Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 ? Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 ? Gunite Specifications 49 ? Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 ® Project Information Signs 51 In-Line Skating Surfacing System 52 ? Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 Gabions and Mattresses 54 F-I Lawn Maintenance S ecifcations 55 Milling 2perations 56 Q Clearing and Grubbing 57 El I Ri ra 58 Treatment Plant Safety 59 Traffic Si al Equipment and Materials 60 Signing And Markin 61 Roadwa Lighting 62 _ Tree Protection 63 ? Project Web Pages r SectionlV.doc Page 5 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such )Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of. As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall ,locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida, 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown. on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information, and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GLADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and, stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged. to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terns from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. Ile City does not Sectionl.V.doc Page 6 of 126 9/9/200$ 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications ' assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in. strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations ' pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers- Association AASHTG American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ' AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute ' APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ' ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ' ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge ' AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute ' CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) ' EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code ' FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code ' FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications ' Sec,'tionlV.doc Page 7 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron. Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (S13CCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBC:CI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) S JI Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of SectionlV.doe Page 8 of 126 9/9/2008 f] 1 ' Section 1V - Technical Specifications a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or ' other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all ' safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. ' Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (b) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE 1-1 1 1 1 Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with. the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and. FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall confornl to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as SectionIV.doc Page 9 of 126 9/912008 Section N - Technical Specifications detennined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal., and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry " 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth, equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and. shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM Al 85). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired, by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. Secti.onlV.doc Page 10 of 126 9/9/2008 t t 1 ' Section IV -Technical Specifications ' 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced.and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be ' replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with. City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as ' base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASI ITO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, ' shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in ' the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the ]Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. 1 The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local ' residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water fiom the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- 1 SectionIV.doc Page I1 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section. IV -'reclinical Specifications construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification Failure to follow the above procedure will result in a Violation and a Stop Work Order will be placed on the project. SectionlV.doc Page 12 of 126 9/9/2008 1 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications Depending on the severity of the Violation, the City's Engineering Department may be required to notify the Department of Environmental Protection for enforcement action. The following procedure will be followed: 1 st occurrence - Stop Work Order 2nd occurrence - Notification to FDEP It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance, STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMEIVT.OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/l 10.0 mg/1 PH, standard units 6.08.5 6.58.5 Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 1631E 0.012 µg/l 0.025 µg/l Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/1 Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/1 2.9 µg/1 Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/l 5.6 µg/l Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µg/l SectionrV.doc Page 13 of 126 9/9/2008 11 Section ;IV - Technical Specifications Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/l 50.0 ?tg/l Benzene 1.0 p.g/l 1.0 µg/l Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µg/1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit orb the Ci o Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: I . the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/1_ In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(l)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. section..Mdoc Page 14 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any ' source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested.. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. ' All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit- 13 SANITARY MANHOLES ' 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into ' concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half We in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. ' Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. ' Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. ' Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. ' 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. ' AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of S inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum ' concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. 1 SeetionIV.doe Page 15 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans, All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail. 4302 Sheet 2 of 3. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A I or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and. bearing. 63.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 - Asphaltic Concrete - Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13,4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13,5 MANHOLE COA:INOS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class 1) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite. 13.5 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. SectioniV.doc Page 16 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness ' unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill. shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS_,_ ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and. secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. ScctionIV.doc Page 17 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of 46 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A 4-57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, i.n conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454E or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall. be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric), Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer_ Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. SectionIV.doc Page 18 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section N -Technical Specifications ' All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. ' All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to tit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. ' 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ' The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TEST INO The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. ' The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by f ling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, ' whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the ' Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the ' line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ' Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of ' storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 1 1 SectionlV.doc Page 19 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEINER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench. without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. SectionIV.doc Page 20 of 126 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications ' Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. ' Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is ' required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical ' Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ' The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured, from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings ' will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS ' The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level ' may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test ' section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furmsh all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire ' length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of ' bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. ' ScctionlV.doc Page 21 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT I 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 2 0.5.2 FORCE MAIN RIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section. 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE SE 22.1 BA This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article I "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional ' roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be S" compacted, minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain 'from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in. a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: SeetionlV,doe Page 22 of ] 2b 9/9/2008 1 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition.), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane lnterlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plaits. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless SectionlV.doc Page 23 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V -Technical Specifications otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.9.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within. acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYP;IENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item.), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). SectionMdoc Page 24 of 126 9/9/2008 fl 11 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. 't'ests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extractionigradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following' 1. Density per Section 330-11 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of '/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness SectionIV.doc Page 25 of 126 9/912008 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are ]Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) Type S-I Type S-I with Type S--III Top Layer Type S-111 FC-3 Type S-Ill with FC-3 Top Layer Type S-1 with FC--3 Top Layer Is 2nd 1, st 2"d 1st 2nd 1st 2"d 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1'/z 1'/a 2 11/4 3/ 1 1 2'/2 1'/4 1.'/4 1'/z 1 .1 %a 1 3 1 /2 1'/z 2 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-111 is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. T'ype S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5ectionI.V.doc Page 26 of 126 9/9/2008 ' Section 1V -Technical Specifications ' 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-Ill per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, ' and all residential streets. 6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of ' 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, ' surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. ' 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the ' level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. ' 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. ' 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. ' 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each ' item.. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: ' The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel ' Section.Mdoc Page 27 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish- The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and. cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed 'by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise -noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom "t"ractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper crust be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard SectionlV.doc Page 28 of 126 9!9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications Specifications. The cost shall 'be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be 1/4" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2_ All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.19 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT ' When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: ' 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT ' shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business 1 SectionIV.doc Page 29 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -- Technical Specifications with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to snake adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform. all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are scherriatic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1,1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon. the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: SectionlV.doc Page 30 of 126 9/9/2008 1 ' Section IV -Technical Specifications ' 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where ' replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. ' 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. ' b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. ' 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground ' improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. ' B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. ' D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to ' comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. ' 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL ' A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 1 ' sectionlV.doc Page 31 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable 1PS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following;, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Safe-T Shear Stem 5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylrrler, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2'/Z" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B SectionlVdoc Page 32 of 126 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications ' 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem ' 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle ' B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. ' 25.1.2,7 SLEEVES A_ Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) ' 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-tbe ' diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. ' B. The valve body and bonnent shall. be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. ' E. The valve shall be as :manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal T.D. tags numbered to match drawings. ' 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks 436 ' concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with 4181015 ' cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION ' 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear ' polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside ' SectionIV,doc Page 33 of 126 9/912008 Section IV - Technical Specifications diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour, (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techhne pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7". B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match. the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.12.10.4 AIRiVAODUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high paint(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =1-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall. be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. u 1 L SectionlV.doc Page 34 of 126 9/9/2005 ' " Section IV - technical Specifications ' 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the ' integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from .the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. ' B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for ' screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized, The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either ' sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station ' run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to ' the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, ' California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER ' A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ASS ' plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. ' A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. ' C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UN1K Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 1 SectionlV,doc Page 35 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 25.1.2.93 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and, grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional, cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this inforniation at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. 1. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. sectionlV.doc Page 36 of 126 9/9/2008 1 ' Section fV - Technical Specifications 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING. 25,1,3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL ' A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25,1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING ' A. Ail pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter ' larger than/2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. ' D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. ' F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. ' G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall ' have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. ' 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on ' Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. ' 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation :from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between ' site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 37 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Dwner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated. on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using 'Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. L Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers 'are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement maybe installed by jacking & boring. SectionlV.doc Page 38 of 126 9/9/2048 Section IV -Technical Specifications ' 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. ' 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. ' 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 1 1 1 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and. Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction., shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and SectionIV.doc Page 39 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-500-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.21.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. 13_ Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. SectionlV.doc Page 40 of 126 9/9/2008 1 ' Section 1V - Technical Specifications ' 25.2.1 .6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of ' bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without ' approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 1 25.2.1 .7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS ' O.A. or ITT : The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or ' similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. G W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf ' sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. ' SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ,ST. TR. : Straight trunk. ' MIN.: Minimuin. ' GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. On center, distance between plant centers. DIA.: ' Diamete r. LVS. Leaves. 1 SectionIV.doc Page 41 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specilkations D.B.H. : Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL. : B&B: PPP: FG: STD.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Plants per pot. Field grown. Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, ,freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough. or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1. foot diameter of ball to every 1, inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. I I,] SectioniV.doc Page 42 of 126 9/9/2008 1 ' Section IV -Technical Specifications ' D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a.mmimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except ' plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabai palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a ' minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of ' delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. ' G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. ' 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. ' A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not ' proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. S. Proceed, with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and ' following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25,2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ' A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy ' SectionIV.doc Page 43 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in. the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground. utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2-2-1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A, Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided. tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and 11, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (Latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. SectionlV,doc Page 44 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications ' E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. ' F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. ' When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. ' G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to ' measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. ' H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. ' I. Bailed and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. ' Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. ' J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. ' K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. SectionrV.doc 1 Page 45 of 126 9/9/2008 ' Section IV -Technical Specifications 25.2.2 .1.5 FERTILIZER ' A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully ' conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the . appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. ' C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. ' D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. ' Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed. granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be , 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/d the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). ' 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. ' Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with ' a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. , D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL , A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened. native soil backfzll. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, ' prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. , B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1 /3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over I". C. Backfill and clean till dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. , There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or ' SectionIV.doc Page 46 of 126 9/9/2008 1 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications ' a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of ' Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. ' 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's ' recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION ' A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed ' so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBII at 4 - ;/Z feet above grade. ' 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for ' protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. ' 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the ' site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES ' A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. ' 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION ' 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation ' of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 1 1 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas SectioniV.doc Page 47 of 126 9/92008 Section IV --Technical Specifications ' adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's , specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting , bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or ' "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the , Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish ' grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. ' F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/a inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated ' material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING ' A. Prepare native subgrade by rototill.ing or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (I/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 , inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. ' 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A, All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with , Monsanto's "Round-Up " per manufactnreF'5 specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. , B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub- grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. ' C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing ' yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (I) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed ' granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. ' Sect.ionl.V.doc Page 48 of 126 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and. ' allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. ' 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) ' A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. ' B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. ' C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well- drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. r 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans ' by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. ' C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant ' S1Ze5. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as ' possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES ' A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after ' settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ' ball about l inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved ' equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. ' Application rate: 1 SectionlV.doc Page 49 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical 5peoifications 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon. 2 - 21 grain tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each 112" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. 13ack1All tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall he properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Back#ill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared. bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles ire a triangular pattern. 1. Saba] palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. E. An application of b-b-b, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. u 1 11 Sectioniv.doc Page 50 of 126 9/0/2008 ' 1 ' Section N-Technical Specifications E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other ' approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall ' be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. It in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean ' silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. ' G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable roved method other a wooden ins or b pp . p y ' 25.2.3 A. .2.5 SEEDING Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. ' 25.2.3 .2.6 TREE GUYINGy BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved ' plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be ' used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two '/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. ' C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final. acceptance of the landscape work. ' D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. ' 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. ' B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. ' D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plait materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. ' E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. ' SectionlV.doc Page 51 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications ' 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING ' A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified. Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, ' and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP ' A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, , keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, , staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION , A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational ' Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adj scent property from darnage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to ' landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms , as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES , E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees , to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the ' Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE ' A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition :from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: ' 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, , replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural ' practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all. work under SectionI'V.doc Page 52 of 126 9/9/2008 1 1 11 Section IV - Technical Specifications the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and//or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. I B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. ' 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in ' writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the ' terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project 'by the ' Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in ' performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract ' price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to ' request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No 1 SectionlV.doc Page 53 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1:V -Technical Specifications additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 26 HOPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.'1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalif ed. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system, and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with. the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method. Value j HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi SectionlV.doe Page 54 of 126 9/9/2008 1 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c-0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ' It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare _the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior ' to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation ' operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal ' in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ' After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television ' system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of tahe entire periphery of the pipe. 1 SectionIV.doc Page 55 of 126 9/9/2108 Section IV.- Technical Specifications 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the foil interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for. installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.6 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour, period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational. sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. Sectionl.V.doc Page 56 of 126 1 9/9/2008 1 1 ?7' n 1 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Max Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS The State of Florida has imposed strict requirements on Solid Wastes Handlers to decrease the generation of solid waste products and in particular to increase the amount of recycle products. In this regard, the City is required to detenrnine the monthly total tonnage of all construction debris which is recycled in this contract. A recycled material is any material reused in any manner which diverts its alternative disposal to a publicly assessable landfill or by incineration. If a material, such as clean earth, is not normally disposed to a landfill or incineration, then it is not to be considered a recyclable material. The Contractor is required to include in each request for payment the total tonnage of materials which were recycled by the contractor during the contract period for which the payment request is made. Any cost to the contractor for the development and submittal of this information is to be included in the contract items provided in the original contract proposal. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s_i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionlV.doc Page 57 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4'"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded, wire mesh shall. be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition. all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 X 1.0/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work. described in this section. and other, applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod. roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod Section7V.doc Page 58 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications ' that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, ' soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be ' determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these ' associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work. and shall be paid for on the ' basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to ' be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used ' instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required ' that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in ' place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. ' 33 STORM MANHGLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES ' For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans ' and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. ' 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ' Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a 1 smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. ' Section]V.doc Page 59 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications The storni structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped. toward. channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article not used. See SECTION 111, ARTICLE 23 - MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLAINS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article not used. See SECTION Ill, ARTICLE 24 - CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimurn of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. SectionfV.doc Page 60 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications ' 37 AUDIOIVIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIOIVIDEO RECORDING ' Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING ' The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. ' 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio ' videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation. ' 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with ' accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with ' proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. ' 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall. be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in ' viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ' All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time infonnation shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom ' out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be ' SectionIV.doc Page 61 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section [v - Technical Specifications properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed. construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system., the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 1.0 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. SectionN.doc Page 62 of 126 9/9/2008 t 1 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive ' remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. 1 The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. SectionIV.doc Page 63 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section 1V --'rethnical Specifications 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and butler area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. French material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and. siltation. SectionlV,doc Page 64, of 126 9/9/2008 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them. responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1st occurrence - Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 reinspection fee 3rd occuurence - $80 reinspecion fee 4th occurrence - Stop work order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 5624741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750. 1 SectionlV.doe Page 65 of 126 9/9/2008 G 15 eU V) .V C .s Op O ° U p wH O U ? W ? V) Z ° U w o oo? con °o ?p© C) 0 ww ? o?? Cn w O Q w cn ? 4 N O O C3, C/a O CIS Q ?wW M bO4 U COO 64 p Vc U U r..-1 o .? ? w ? { r-O ? N kn N '"r Phi C- fq IV k- c U a ? H U ? A U ? z a ? a W m O ? O q ?3 O N id Q. [ N a c I- U /Q 00 G ?O? ?b cd G C O V u ca PQ M11? V 9 O Q m CD F Z ° o G w LL) z Fri 0 0 Q J 0 Odd4 00 0 0 N T O? 14, CIA w G 10 W N b U G Section N - Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution. & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 21 - AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.E SCOPE The Contractor shall fumish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backftlling and clean up. SectionlV.doc Page 67 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V - 'T'echnical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2,1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/.AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 $" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 151 /A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: $ectionlV.doc Page 68 of 128 9/9/2008 1 r Section IV - Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18 inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury splice kit (3M or equal) approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS ' Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C1 53/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall ' be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AWWA CI11/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA ' Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. ' 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved ' mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint ' con;,ectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING ' All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Each end of the ' SectionlV.doc Page 69 of 128 9/9/2008 Section N-Technical Specifications casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified., valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch and smaller Diameter: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification 0509 latest revision. "These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal and internal cast iron parts coated with corrosion resistent coating. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with. EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, and valved by-pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3 piece valve box assemble. The Iower pate of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater water system: 0 Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant SectionIV.doc 9/9/2008 1 Page 70 of 128 1 1 11 Section N- Technical Specifications AVK Nostalgic 2780. American Darling B-84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and include the following modifications. Must be UL / FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a 97 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stern will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 1 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper ' nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. SectionlV.doc Page 71 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1.V - Technicai Specifications All fire hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P_V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked., misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.23 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. 13ackflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system.. The types of devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located. between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. Since installed devices must be tested annually and may be maintained by the City of Clearwater, following are the approved models of devices allowed for installation by customers of the City of Clearwater Water Distribution system: SectioniV.doc Page 72 of 128 9/9/2008 [7 Section IV - Technical Specifications DOUBLE CHECK VALVE 2" a d a lei ar er than 2" Conbraco 40100 Conbraco 40100 Hersey Beeco Model FDC Hersey Beeco No. 2 Watts Model 709 or 007 Watts Model 709 or 007 FEBCO Model 805Y Ames 2000 SS REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE 2" and Smaller Larger than Z" Ames 4000 SS Conbraco 40200 Conbraco 40200 Hersey Beeco Model FRP II Herse y Beeco Model 6CM FERCO Model 825Y _ Watts Model 909 or 009 Watts Model 909 or 009 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ' Steel body tapping sleeves shall. be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412; Clow Corporation 3460; or equal. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug. ' 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 1 41.3 CONSTRICTION ' 41.3.1 MAT ERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall ' such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. ' 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part: of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. ' 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE ' The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the reauired lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant steins plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly flushed before any pressure testing and ' sterilization of the pipe can be completed. SectionlV.doe Page 73 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and. protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention, The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting em-h into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall. be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved back-fill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirtl:rom entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in. a neat and -workmanlike manner without damage `iQ u19e pipe or GeIrleIlt 112]Ing and so as to leave a Sii3QOt11 end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom. and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. SectionIV.doc Page 74• of 1.29 9/9/2008 11 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications ' Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ' ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. ' 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL ' Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. ' 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18-inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb ' over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. [ 1 1 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans or specified in the field by the Engineer. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made Section]V.doc Page 75 of 128 9/9/2008 Seetion.1V - Technical. Specifications until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections, shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS .After installation. of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater Water Division 48 hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the elesest point available to ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed SectionIV,doc Page 76 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or City of Clearwater Construction Inspection personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed. before the systen, is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. ' 41.6 MEASPUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL ' Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will c0118titute full ' compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work- I 1 • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfili • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SectionfV, doc Page 77 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSIIAWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. Didn't the method of payment change to per piece instead of per tonnage? 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HY'D RANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionIV.doc Page 78 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications ' anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. ' 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ' All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned ' into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 SASE COURSE ' Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical ' Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall ' conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". ' 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A_Leveling Course shall be a minimum of I" of Type S-111 Asphaltic Concrete as specified in ' Section 331 of FDOT's Standard. Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot ' straight edge. If a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. ' 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of V of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section ' 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface ' shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will SectionIV.doc Page 79 of 128 9/9/2008 Section. IV -Technical Specifications be approved.. If a deficiency of more than 114" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense ur_derllayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum, of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionIV.doc Page 80 of 128 9/9/2008 ?J 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for,clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall fimiish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (S) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. Sectionlv.doc Page 81 of 128 9/9/2008 Section rV - Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for placating beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE The sub-grade shall be graded. to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required.. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionlV.doc Page 82 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.7 LINER ' Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE ' The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth. and even, and it ' shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM ' Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the ' pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system. 1 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43e2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of 1SP Type 11 Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend, material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionlV.doc Page 83 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -'T'echnical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black.. Basis of Design Ameristar HT 25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar IIT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1.-3/4" ##6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch., fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durasliade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hernu-ned with gro='?nets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.18 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in, length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2010.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionIV,doc Page 84 of '128 9/9/2008 1 1 1 17, 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 -- 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum.; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Prolinc. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Praline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction " Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) - six-foot length aluminum. 1 SectionIV.doc Page 85 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" --- 81ong x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of Portland, cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum. size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. 'T'he City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: Section.l.V_doc Page 86 of 128 9/9/2008 1 ? 17 ' Section IV -Technical Specifications Pole Tl existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 ' Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits ' Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 ' Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels end ed up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall rel cation li ht oles accordin l la p n o g p g y. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. ' New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. ' 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.16.1 SHOP DRAWINGS ' The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. ' 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION ' Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY ' 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all ' equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY ' The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. 1 SectionIV.doc Page 87 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish., operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part Vl, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U. S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. Promote speedy completion. of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 5ecti.on]V.doc Page 88 of 128 9/9/2008 1 1 ' Section 1V --Technical Specifications 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDDT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of ' requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the ' designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ' Obtain permits for Pinellas County and .Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. ' 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected ' by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ' Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. ' 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION ' Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 1 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44,3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C-View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Proiect, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SectionlV.doc Page 89 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work cone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in, the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall. be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING 45,'I INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand SectionlV.doe Page 90 of 128 9/912008 1.1 1 1 Section IV Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionlV.doc Page 91 of 128 9/9/2008 Section N- Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including. operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system far bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight- No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed. to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system. users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be trade per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. Section]V.doc Page 92 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section 1V - Technical Specifications ' 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, ' high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D ' 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification n shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being, supplied. ' 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus ' maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, ' holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in ' plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the ' testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1,3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical ' properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. ' 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this ' specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ' Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. ' SectionJV.doc Page 93 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. if the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not darnaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ]Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer. 1.6-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer. 18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer. 21 %z-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer. 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing; line shall be cleared of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. SectionIV.doc Page 94 of 128 9/9/2008 Section (V - Technical Specifications ' 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. ' Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. ' An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times ' the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and ' removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be ' connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. ' Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it ' terminates. After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner ' shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. - ' The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. ' The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. ' 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and. installation of the liner. ' 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. Section[v.doe Page 95 of 128 9/92008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary constriction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 45.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe canna be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of--ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE. This specification. designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl. chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and. Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SectionMdoc Page 96 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal_) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. ' Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C 150 for Portland Cement, Type 1. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. ' Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 1 Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shoterete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished., bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. Sectionl.V.doc Page 97 of 128 9/9/2008 Section TV - Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean., strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Finc aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. Section.lV.doc Page 98 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING ' Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of ' all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 1 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the SectionlV.doc Page 99 of 129 9/9/2008 Section 1V -'technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from. the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film: of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high. areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall. be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. Section.]VAOC Page 100 of 129 9/9/2008 1 Section N - Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. ' Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air ' pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: f] 1 Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 15/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 21/2 2112 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. ' Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made ' for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. ' Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. ' The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). 1 SectionJV.doc Page 101 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be .met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payixnent for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall treasure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory cert ification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SectionMdoe Page 102 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV -'T'echnical specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. ' Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. ' Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. ' Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. ' Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically ' as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. ' Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. ' Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. 1 Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill arol d the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing ' sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness ' and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. ' 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong ' Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural ' cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: ' 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SectionlV,doe Page 103 of 128 9/9/2008 Section. IV - 1'echnical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 r in., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 4/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, l hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi. 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. SectionlV,doc Page 104 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications ' Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. ' Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Sag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 55 pounds per ' cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater ' than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. ' Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough ' troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 1 49.8 WATER ' Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ' No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. ' 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles ' with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete ' with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. ' 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION ' 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. ' 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and ' SectioniV.doc Page 105 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 7V -- Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into tthe holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform. thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A. brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. Section]'v.doc Page 106 of 128 1 9/9/2009 1 1 n 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum] pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cernentitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 r ' SectionIV.doc r Page 107 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density Tensile Strength Elongation Shrinkage Toxicity 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574 150 psi ASTM D- 412 250% ASTM D-3574 Less than 4% ASTM D-1042 Non Toxic A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING 380 psi (2.62 MPa) at 100% RH 325 psi (2.24 MPa) at 50% RH 8. I x10 llcrn/sec to 7.6x10 ci n/sec A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural. integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: 1 Calcium Aluminate Cement 1 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 1 7 Days l 28 Days SectionlV.doe Page 108 of 128 9/9/2008 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity - X0.04 X0.06 X0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. I'lie calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This ' epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its ' uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 ' Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 ' Tensile Elongation, % 10-20 Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 ' 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE ' Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. ' 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ' 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. ' 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. ' b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean, and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. ' SectionlV.doc Page 109 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section. N - Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Brill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. S' ctionlV.doc Page 110 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING ' Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. ' 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. ' 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. ' 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article not used. See Section III, ARTICLE 1.8 - PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. ' 51 IN-LAVE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE ' 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the ' SectionlV_doc Page 1 I 1 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. ##80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement_ 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfaccr 55 gallons Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-400 pounds Liquid Yield 112.138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.1.7. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix SectionIV.doe Page 112 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications ' must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. ' 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted ' rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION ' 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and ' provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with ' sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hocke y Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition. that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. ' 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled ' with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. ' 51.6 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F_ ' 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. ' Sectionl V.doc Page 113 of 128 9/912008 1 Section Iv--Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction w 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70°F with 60% relative humidity. 11 _ Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONS T RU?TIGN This article not applicable. See Section III. (General Conditions), Article 22. 53 GABI®NS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1. GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461 H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table I. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal. mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 '/z inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 ''/z), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining; in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minim-Lim 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tice 5ectionIV.doc Page 1.14 of 128 9/9/2008 u 1 Section N - Technical Specifications ' Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A-641. 53.1.7.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING ' The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: ' a. According to AS'I" M D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: ' a. According to ASTM 1.242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but ' not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. ' 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is ' submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: ' a. According to ASTM B-117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. ' SectionMdoc Page 115 of 128 9/9/2008 Section TV -'technical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid. and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and, double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SectiontV.doc Page 117 of 128 9/9/2008 1 1 1 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to ' opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction, shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. ' Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and .mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the ' cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be ' replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. i 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ' 54.'1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ' ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; 0 Trash and debris removal from the job site; 0 Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; ' • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; 0 Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); Irrigation service and repair; Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the ' 0 Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract ' maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., ' be completed before leaving the job site. I SectionN.doc Page 118 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section 1.V -Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm. pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded. head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. SecIionlv,doc Page 119 of 128 919/2008 ' Section TV -Technical Specifications ' 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ' Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. ' 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in amid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ' Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor ' at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION ' Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation. and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and ' operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved. in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to ' the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ' Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be ' replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. ' 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 1 1 SectionIV.doc Page 120 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one. (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work. as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain th.e message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. SectionIV',doc Page 121 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section N -- Technical Specifications ' 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike mariner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature ' caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next ' regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked ' vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be ' performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 1 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible t to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. ' 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of ' the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper niust be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep ' debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. ' 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line ' and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 1 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for 1 SectionIV.doc Page 122 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section 1V, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City= A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical. geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. SectionlV.doc Page 123 of 128 9/9/2008 ' ' Section IV - Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS ' Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 1 The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. ' 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of ' radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. ' 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1 The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through 1 the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the 1 Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 1 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and 1 grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 1 The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 1 57 RIPRAP 1 The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (lastest edition). 1 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SectionIV.doc Page 124 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section 1V - Technical specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item, for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of nibble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with. the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: » Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around. gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies,. pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, SectionMdoc Page 125 of 128 9/9/2008 Section rV -Technical Specifications ' pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's ' Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All ' mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. ' All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. ' Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. ' 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to ' complete the work per the plans. 50 SIGNING AND MARKING ' All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. ' This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). ' The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed- Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacke&out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings 60.1 shall be BASIS OF corrected to the City's MEASUREMENT satisfaction AND prior to any paPAYMENTyment being made. ' The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the ' work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING ' All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. ' 51.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans ' and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 1 SectionlV.doe Page 126 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction. activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no leGG than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and. root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system- Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by SectionIV.doc Page 127 of 128 9/9/2008 1 ' Section IV -Technical specifications ' construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root ' Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. 1. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. 't'ree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfiil or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. SectioinfV.doc Page 128 of 128 9/9/2008 Section N - Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Plush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PACES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: bgp: /www.w3. ?-I811999/WAI-WFBCONTENT 19990505/ v/ http_-,//www.section508.,go In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design. /aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. sectionlV.doc Page 129 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications ' 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ' The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. ' 63.6 POSTING The site should. be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, ' should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. ' 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages ' up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 130 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1'V - Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8, Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend. Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Tempcrature -Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimLim specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum, loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12% sectionlv.doc Page 116 of 128 9/9/2008 1 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE ' CHAPTER 64E-9 I PUBLIC SWIMMING POOLS AND BATHING PLACES 1 CHAPTER 64E-9 PUBLIC SWIMMING POOLS AND BATHING PLACES ' 64E-9.001 General. 64E-9.002 Definitions. 64E-9.003 Forms. 64E-9.0035 Exemptions. ' 64E-9.004 Operational Requirements. 64E-9.005 Construction Plan or Modification Plan Approval. 64E-9.006 Construction Plan Approval Standards. 64E-9.007 Recirculation and Treatment System Requirements. 6413-9.008 Supervision and Safety. 64E-9,009 Wading Pools. 64E-9.010 Spa Pools. ' 64E-9,011 Water Recreation Attractions and Specialized Pools. 64E-9.012 Special Purpose Pools. (Repealed) 64E.-9.013 Bathing Places. 64E-9,014 Authorization and Opcra.ting Pcrnnit. (Repealed) 64E-9.015 Fee Schedule. ' 64E-9.016 Variances. 64E-9.017 Enforcement. 6413-9.018 Public Pool Service Technician Certification ' 64E-9.001 General (1) Regulation of public swimming pools and bathing places is considered by the department as significant in the prevention of disease, sanitary nuisances, and accidents by which the health or safety of ' an individual(s) may be threatened or impaired, (a) Any modification resulting in the operation of the pool in a manner unsanitary or dangerous to public health or safety shall subject the state operating permit to suspension or revocation. (b) Failure to comply with any of the requirements of these rules shall constitute a public nuisance ' dangerous to health. (2) This chapter prescribes minimum design, construction, and operation requirements. (a) The department will accept dimensional standards for competition type pools as published by the National Collegiate Athletic Association, 2008; Federation Internationale de Natation Amateur (FINA), ' 2005-2009 Handbook; 2006-2007 Official Rules and. Code of USA Diving with 2007 Amendments by USA Diving Inc.; 2008 USA Swimming Rules and Regulations, and National Federation of State High School Associations, Swimming and Diving and Water Polo Rules Book, 2008-2009, which are incorporated by reference in these rules and can be obtained from: NCAA.org, fina.org, usadiving.org, usaswimming.org, and nfhs.org, respectively. (b) Where adequate standards do not exist and these rules do not provide sufficient guidance for consideration of innovations in design, construction, and operation of proposed swimming pools or water recreation attractions, the department will establish requirements necessary to protect the health and safety ' of the pool patrons. (3) All pools which do not meet the definition of private pools are public pools, (4) The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 may relate to public pools and should be reviewed by ' the design engineer and the pool owner. Chapter 11 and Section 424,1 of the Florida Building Code (2007, with 2009 amendments) also have application to public pools. Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514.021, 514.03, 514.031, ' 514.05, 514,06 FS. History=New 10-5-93, Formerly I OD-5.130, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5-24-09. 64E-9.002 Definitions (1) "Advanced Level Swimmer" - A person able to swim unassisted for five minutes or more. (2) "Bathing Load" - The maximum number of persons allowed in the pool or bathing place at one time. (3) "Closed Pool"- A pool which is not to be used by bathers and is pasted with a pool closed sign visible from the pool deck or is inaccessible. (4)"Collector Tank" - A reservoir, with a minimum of 2.25 square feet water surface area open to the ' atmosphere, from which the recirculation or feature pump takes suction, which receives the gravity flow 1 from the main drain line, surface overflow system or feature water source line, and that is cleanable. (5) "D.E." - is the Diatomaceous Earth that is used as a filter aid in DE type filters. For the purpose of this rule, it also includes alternative filter aids that have been approved under NSF/ANSI Standard 50-2007, and accepted by the filter manufacturer. (6) "Department" - The Department of Health (DOH), specifically, Division of Environmental Health and county health departments unless specified otherwise. (7) "Effective Barrier" - A barrier which consists of a building, or equivalent structure, plus a 48 inch minimum height fence on the remaining sides or a continuous 48 inch minimum height fence. All access through the barrier must have one or more of the following safety features: alarm, key lock or self=locking doors and gates. Safety covers that comply with the American Society for Testing Materials standard F1346-91 (2003) may also be considered as an effective barrier, (8) "Flow Through" - Continuous verifiable inflow and outflow or in the case of spring fed lakes shall be verifiable by continuous outflow. (9) "Inaccessible"-.Enclosed by an effective barrier. (10) Interactive Water Features - A structure designed to allow for recreational activities with recirculated, fi.ltcrcd, and treated water; but having minimal standing water. Water from the interactive fountain type features is collected by gravity below grade in a collector tank or sump. The water is filtered, disinfected and then pumped to the feature spray discharge heads- (] 1) "Lifeguard" - Person responsible for the safety of the users of a public swimming pool. (12) "Living Unit" - Room(s) or spaces capable of being occupied by an individual or group for temporary or permanent lodging purposes. This includes motel and hotel rooms, apartment units, boarding house rooms, condominium units, travel trailers, recreational vehicles, mobile homes, single family homes, and individual units in multiple unit housing complexes. (13) "Marking" or "Markings" - Refers to the placement and installation of visual marking cues to help patrons identify step, bench and swimout outlines, slope break location, depth designations, and NO ENTRY and NO DIVING warnings. When markings are specified by code to be dark the terrii dark shall mean a Munsell Color Value from zero to four. (14) "Modification" - Any act which changes or alters the original characteristics of the pool as approved. For example, changes in the recirculation systems, decking, treatment systems, disinfection system, and pool shape are modifications. (15) "NTU" -- Nephelometric Turbidity Unit which is a means of measuring water clarity. (16) "Perimeter Overflow Gutter" - A level trough or ledge around the inside perimeter of the pool containing drains to clean the pool water surface. (17) "Plunge Pool" --- The receiving body of water located at the terminus of a recreational water slide, (18) "Pool Floor" - The interior pool bottom surface which consists of that area from a horizontal plane up to a maximum of a 45 degree slope. (19) "Pool Wall" - The interior pool side surfaces which consist of that area from a vertical. plane to a 45 degree slope- (20) "Pool Turnover" - The circulation of the entire pool volume through the filter system. Pool volume shall be determined from the design water level which is the normal operating water level; for gutter type pools is the horizontal plane of the upper lip of the gutter and for skimmer pools is the centerline of the skimmer opening. (21) "Preooat Pot" -- A container with a valved connection to the suction side of the recirculation pump of a pressure diatomaceous earth (D.E.) type filter system used for coating the filter with D.E. powder or NSF/ANSI Standard 50-2007 and manufacturer approved substitute filter aid. (22) "Private Pool" - See Section 51.4.011(3), F-S. (23) "Public Bathing Place" - See Section 514-011(4), F.& The bathing water areas of public bathing places include lakes, ponds, rivers, springs, streams, and artificial impoundments. (24) "Public Swimming Pool" or "Public Pool" - See Section 514.01 1(2), F.S. (25) "Recirculation System" - The system of piping and mechanics designed to remove the water from the pool then filter, disinfect and return it to the pool. (26) "River Ride" - A water recreation attraction designed to convey bathers around a relatively fiat coarse using an artificially created current. (27) "Sanitary Survey" - A professional assessment of any existing and potential sources of pollution of a specific land or water area. (28) "Slip Resistant'- Having a textured surface which is not conducive to slipping under contact of 2 bare feet unlike glazed tile or masonry terrazzo and non-textured plastic materials. Manufactured surface ' products shall be designated by the manufacturer as suitable for walking surfaces in wet areas. (29) "Spa Pool" - A pool used in conjunction with high velocity air or water. (30) "Special Purpose Pool" - A public pool used exclusively for a specific, supervised purpose, including springboard or platform diving training, SCUBA diving instruction, and aquatic programs for ' handicapped individuals, pre-school or kindergarten children. (31) "Swimming Instructor'- Person who offers progressive swimming instruction. (32) "Swimming Pool Slide" a slide designed by its manufacturer to discharge over the sidewall of a swimming pool. ' (33) "Swim Spa" - A pool used in conjunction with a directional flow of water against which one swims. (34) "Wading Pool" - A shallow pool designed to be used by children. (35) "Water Recreation Attraction" - A facility with design and operational features that provide patron recreational activity and purposefully involves immersion of the body partially or totally in the water. ' Water recreation attractions include water slides, river rides, water course rides, water activity pools, interactive water features, wave pools and any additional pool within the boundaries of the attraction. (36) "Water Activity Pool" - A. water recreation attraction which has water related activities such as rope ladders, rope swings, cargo nets and other similar activities. ' (37) "Water Slides" - A water recreation attraction ride which is characterized by having trough-like or tubular flumes or chutes. (38) "Water Theme Park" - Means a complex with controlled access, fenced and gated attraction where ' guests enter through a limited number of entrances upon purchase of a ticket. These facilities are permanent and consist of multiple water recreation attractions. Lifeguards are present during all operating hours. (39) "Water Therapy Facilities" as that term is used in section 514.0115(1), F.S., are pools used exclusively for water therapy to treat a diagnosed injury, illness, or medical condition, wherein the therapy ' is provided under the direct supervision of a Florida licensed physical therapist, occupational therapist, or athletic trainer; pursuant to a prescription by a physician or a physician's assistant (PA) licensed pursuant to chapters 458 or 459, F.S., a podiatrist licensed pursuant to chapter 461, F.S., or an advanced registered nurse practitioner (ARNP) licensed pursuant to chapter 464, F.S.; and the prescribing physician, PA, ' podiatrist or ARNP, authorizes a plan of treatment justifying use of the pool for health care purposes. (40) "Wave Pool" - A water recreation attraction that is characterized by wave action. (41) "Wet Deck Area" - The four foot wide unobstructed pool deck area around the outside of the pool water perimeter, curb, ladders, handrails, diving boards, diving towers, pool slides, waterfalls, water ' features, starting blocks, planters, or lifeguard chairs. (42) "Zero Depth Entry Pool" - A pool where the pool floor continues to slope upward to a point where it meets the surface of the water and the pool deck. ' Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 514.021, 514.03, 514.031, 514.05, 514.06, 514.071 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Formerly I OD-5.131, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5-24-09. 64E-9.003 Forms ' (1) All forms listed in this chapter are herein incorporated by reference and may be obtained from the department, at: http://www.doh.state.fl.us/environment/water/swim/download.html, or write to DOH, Bureau of. Water Programs, mail bin C-22, 4052 Bald Cypress Way, Tallahassee 32399-1742, or at the ' local county health department. The following forms are for use by the department or the public: (a) DH 1350, 7/08, Public Swimming Pool Engineering Inspection Report. (b) DH Form 920, Ian, 04, Public Pool and Bathing Place Inspection Report. (c) DH 921, 3/98, Monthly Swimming Pool Report. ' (2) Upon receipt of the following properly completed forms, the department shall approve or deny the following applications in accordance with the provisions of Chapters 120 and 514, F.S.; (a) DH 4065, 3/98, Application For A Swimming Pool Exemption Status 32 units or less. (b) DH 1704, 3/98, Application For A Swimming Pool Exemption Status More Than 32 Units. ' (c) DH 914, 7/08, Application For Approval Of Swimming Pool Plans. (d) DH 916, 7/08, Application for Swimming Pool Operating Pernit/Authorization. (e) DH 917, 3/98, Application for a Bathing Place Operating Permit/Authorization. (f) DH 4063, 3/98, Application for Annual Renewal or Reissuance of Public Swimming Pool/Bathing ' Place Operating Permit. 3 1 (g) DH 4080, 7/08, Application for Variance from Chapter 64E-9, F.A.C. (h) DH 4144 1/09, Application for Swimming Pool Exemption Status- Water Therapy Facilities Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514.0115, 514.021, 514.025, 514.03, 514.031, 514.033 FS. History-Now 10-5-93, Formerly IOD-5.132, Amended 12-27-98, 3-30-00, 5- 27-04, 5-24-09. 64E-9.0035 Exemptions (1) A person seeking an initial exemption, or an existing facility claiming to be exempt from department regulation pursuant to the provisions of section 514:0115, F.S., shall apply to the department on €orms listed in. Rule 6411-9.003, F.A.C. Each such application shall be renewed bi-annually, by July I' of each even numbered year. (a) Applicants for a swimming pool exemption pursuant to (2)(a) or (2)(b) or (1), of section 514.0115, FS, shall submit the following information along with the applicable department form listed: 1. For condominiums: the recorded declaration. of condominium; the condominium's articles of incorporation; bylaws, and all duly adopted and recorded amendments; supplements, and recorded exhibits thereto; a copy of a plot plan diagram for the proposed property; and form DH 4065 for 32 units or less, or DH 1704 for more than 32 units, or 2. For cooperatives: the articles of incorporation of the association, bylaws, and the ground lease or other underlying lease, if any; the document evidencing a unit owner's membership or share in the association; and the document recognizing a unit owner's title or right of possession to his or her unit; a copy of a plot plan diagram for the proposed property; and a completed form DH 4065 for 32 units or less, or DH 1704 for more than 32 units. 3. For exemption as a water therapy facility pool: along with a completed form DH4144; a written statement signed by a medical professional that they have already, or intend to prescribe medical water therapy for a patient in the pool. This medical professional shall be a physician or a physician's assistant (PA) licensed pursuant to chapters 458 or 459, RS., a podiatrist licensed pursuant to chapter 461, F.S., or an advanced registered nurse practitioner (ARN.P) licensed pursuant to chapter 464, F.S. For subsequent biannual exemption renewals, in addition to the signed written statement from a medical professional as required above, each water therapy facility shall provide a list of the Florida licensed physical therapist(s), occupational therapist(s), and athletic trainer(s) providing therapy in the pool. (b) For purposes of section 514.0115 , FS, the term condominium shall be as defined in chapter 718, FS, and the term cooperative shall be as defined in chapter 719, FS. (2) A person who sought and received an exemption from public swimming pool regulation, shall contact the department if the conditions upon which the exemption was granted change so as to eliminate the exemption status. Under such circumstances, the pool must be modified in order to comply with the provisions of this chapter and chapter 514, F.S. (3) An. exemption from department rules does not exempt the pool from Florida Building Code (2007 with 2009 amendments) requirements, found in sections 1 I and 424.1 Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented, 514.0115, FS. History-New 5-24-09- 64E-9.004 Operational Requirements (1) Water Quality -- The water supply for all pools shall be an approved potable water system or shall meet the requirements for potable water systems by the submission from the operator of bacteriological, and chemical laboratory reports to the county health department. Salt water sources are exempt from the potable water chemical standards except for iron and color requirements. (a) Cross-connection prevention - An atmospheric break or approved back flow prevention device shall be provided in each pool water supply line that is connected to a public water supply. Vacuum breakers shall be installed on all hose bibbs. (b) Bacteriological quality -- The pool water shall be free of colifortn bacteria contamination.. (c) Clarity- The pool water shall be 0.5 or less NTU and the main drain grate must be readily visible from the pool deck. (d) Chemical quality - Chemicals used in controlling the quality of the pool water shall be tested and approved using the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF-ANSI) Standard 60-2005, Drinking Water 't'reatment Chemicals-Health Effects dated September, 2005, which is incorporated by reference in these 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 rules and shall be compatible with other accepted chemicals used in pools. The following parameters shall be adhered to for pool water treatment; 1.pH-7.2to7.8. 2. Disinfection -- Free chlorine residual shall be 1 milligram per liter (mg/L) to 10 mg/L, inclusive, in conventional swimming pools and 2 mg/L to 10 mgfL, inclusive, in all other type pools such as spa-type pools and, interactive water fountains; bromine residual shall be 1.5 mg/L to 10 mg/L, inclusive, in conventional swimming pools and 3 mg/L to 10 mg/L, inclusive, in all other type pools. Except that, the following maximum disinfectant levels shall apply to indoor conventional swimming pools: 5 mg/L free chlorine or 6 ing/L bromine. 3. When oxidation-reduction potential controllers are required, the water potential shall be kept between 700 and 850 millivolts. Use of these units does not negate the manual daily testing requirement of subsection 64E-9.004(13), F.A.C. 4. Cyanuric acid - 100 mg/L maximum in pools, with 40 mg/L as the recommended maximum, and 40 tng/L maximum in spa pools 5. Quaternary ammonium - 5 mg/L maximum 6. Copper - '1 mg/L maximum 7. Silver -- 0.1 mg/L maximum (e) Landscape irrigation water that wets the wet deck area of the pool, the pool itself, enters the collector tank, or wets an interactive water feature must be potable water from a public water system. (2) Manual addition of chemicals will be allowed under special conditions and requires that the pool be closed prior to addition and for at least 1 hour period after addition or a longer period as necessary for sufficient and safe distribution of the chemical. After treatment for breakpoint chlorination and algae prevention, use of the pool can be resumed when the free chlorine levels drop to 10 mg/L. (3) Cleanliness - The pool and pool deck shall be kept free from sediment, floating debris, visible dirt and algae, fools shall be refinished when the pool surfaces cannot be maintained in a safe and sanitary condition. (4) Food and beverages are prohibited in the pool and on the pool wet deck area; animals and glass containers are prohibited within the fenced pool area, or 50 feet from pool edge when no fence exists. (5) The pool recirculation system must be operated at all times when the pool is open for use. The recirculation system may be shut off three hours after the pool closes but must resume operation three hours before opening the pool. Shut down time must be controlled by a time clock. (6) The pool water level must be maintained at an elevation suitable for continuous skimming without flooding during periods of non-use. (7) All equipment and appurtenances shall be kept in good repair. (8) When use of a public swimming pool requires an admission or a membership fee, the most recent pool inspection report shall be posted in plain view of existing and potential members and patrons. (9) Sanitary facilities shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition and sanitary supplies such as toilet paper, paper towels or blow dryer, soap and waste baskets shall be provided. (10) Footbaths are prohibited. (11) Test kits are required to be on the premises of all pools to determine free active chlorine and total chlorine using N,N-Diethyl-p-Phenylenediamine (DPD), or bromine level, total alkalinity, calcium hardness, and pH. (a) The following test kits shall be provided if the corresponding chemicals are used: cyanuric acid, sodium chloride, quaternary ammonium, ozone and copper. (12) Activity accessories such as volleyball and basketball nets may be used for designated times provided a clear four foot deck area is maintained behind the structures. When the pool is open for general use such accessories roust be removed. (13) The keeping of a daily record of information regarding pool operation, using the Monthly Swimming Pool Report - DH 9213/98, obtained from the local county health department, shall be the responsibility of the pool owner or operator. Customized report forms may be substituted provided they contain the appropriate information. and are acceptable to the department. The completed report shall reflect manually conducted pool water tests for pH and disinfectant levels at least once every 24 hours, and weekly testing for eyanuric acid when chlorinated isocyanurates are used at spas and pools, and shall be retained at the pool or submitted monthly as required by the local health department. DH 921, 3/98, may be obtained at the local county health department. For the purposes of daily testing of the pool water and keeping of the Monthly Swimming Pool Log, the requirements of Rule 64E-9.018, F.A.C., are not applicable. 1 (14) Should a human. fecal accident occur, the pool operator or owner shall comply with all recommendations found in the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention's (CDC) "Fecal accident response recommendations for Aquatics Staff"dated February 15, 2008, found on the department's in.ternet web site: http://www.floridasb.ealth.org/E-nvironment/water/swimJindex.html. Alternative emergency disinfection methods developed by industry, or by the application of new disinfection technology, or by the use of chemical disinfectants that are effective, safe and appropriate for public bathing facilities, and are approved by the CDC, may also be used. (15) For pools used at night or when adequate natural lighting is not available, the lighting requirements of 64E-9.006(2)(c) shall be met. Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514,021, 514.03, 514.03'1, 514.05, 514.06 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Formerly i OD-5.I33, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5-24-09. 64E-9.005 Construction Platt or Modification Plan Approval it is unlawful for any person(s) to begin construction or modification of any public pool without first having received written approval from the department. Unapproved fools and proposed modifications to previously approved aspects of pools shall satisfy the requirements of the rules in effect at the time of project plans submittal- The department shall allow flow velocities through the main drain and surface overflow system piping which exceed those specified in subsection 64E-9.007(8), F.A_C., when retrofitting the pool recirculation system with a collector tank. However, the design engineer must provide appropriate calculations justifying the design. The flow rate through the main drain grating shall not exceed L5 feet per second. (1) Construction Plan Approval -- In counties where the county health department is delegated authority to review and approve plans, projects shall be submitted by the design engineer directly to these county health departments. Projects in all other counties shall be submitted either to the Bureau of Water Programs, 4052 Bald Cypress Way, BIN C-22, Tallahassee, FL 32399-1742 or to the Bureau of Water Programs, 400 West Robinson Street, Suite S-532, Orlando, FL 32801-1752 as appropriate. (a) The following shall be submitted for each pool with a separate filter system. Except that when several pools are to be constructed at the same site, at the same time, those pools can be submitted on the same set of plans. Each submittal shall include six sets of original applications and drawings or the number required by the reviewing entity: 1 _ :Form DH 914. 2. Construction drawings of the project which contain sufficient detail to clearly apprise the department of the work to be undertaken which includes a site map with nearest cross streets and major thoroughfares, all views of the pool including dimensions, equipment area or enclosure, project layout and location, sanitary facility detail and location, a scaled site plan, a property survey (if available), a pool equipment list including the manufacturer or distributor names, model numbers, and catalog numbers or equipment description. All prints shall be drawn to a standard scale and shall be a minimum size of 18 x 24 inches and a maximum size of 36 x 42 inches. The details on the drawings shall be satisfactory for photographic reproduction. Color coded drawings are not acceptable. A four by six inch blank space shall be left vacant on the lower right hand. corner or directly above the title block on each sheet. 3. Fees for each pool as required by Pule 64E-9.015, F.A.C. 4. If available, an electronic copy of the plans in PDF, TIF, DWG, or JPEG format. (b) All drawings and. applications shall be prepared, signed and sealed by a professional engineer, licensed in the State of Florida under provisions of Chapter 471, F.S., and shall fulfill the requirements of Section 471.025, F.S. (c) If the initial application is not complete, the reviewing engineer shall request the information needed to complete the application. (d) If the engineering plans are substantially in compliance with these rules, provisional approval shall be granted and the approval shall state all necessary corrective action to be completed prior to issuance of the operating permit, Provisional approvals require that a copy of the provisos be attached to each set of approved plans and the plans shall be marked provisional. (e) Upon approval; the plans and, applications not required for use by the department shall be delivered to the design engineer for distribution to the owner and pool contractor. There shall be one complete set of approved. plans and documents on the pool construction site at all times during construction. (f) Revision of approved plans prior to construction must have written approval from the department. Revision of plans after construction commencement shall be considered a modification. (g) Individual pieces of equipment which are equivalent to equipment specified on the approved plans may be substituted during construction provided the engineer justifies the equivalency to the department along with the authorization application. Equipment packages, piping, and filters do not qualify for substitution without prior written plans approval from the department. (h) If construction of the pool shell has not commenced within one year from the date of plans approval, the approval shall expire. After plans approval expires, and there have been no changes to Chapter 64E-9, FAC, that affect the proposed plans, the applicant may submit the same plans to the department for re- approval, along with the fee established in 64E-9.01 5(1)(b). If there have been changes to Chapter 64E-9, FAC. that affect the proposed plans, or if the plans differ from the original. submission, then the applicant must submit the fee established in 64E-9.015(1)(a). (i) Upon completion of the project the following shall be submitted for each pool to the reviewing entity: 1. Form DH916, incorporated by reference at paragraph 64E-9.003(2)(d), F.A.C., bearing original signatures of all required signatories and the scal of the professional engineer and three copies. 2. Fees for each pool as required by Rule 64E-9.015, F.A.C. 3. When night swimming is proposed, an engineer licensed in Florida shall provide certification that the deck and surface lighting requirements ofparagraph 64E-9.006(2)(c), F.A.C., have been met. (j) After satisfactory and timely correction of any deficiencies following the final construction inspection conducted by the department, the initial operating permit will be issued. (2) Modifications - Modifications include non-equivalent changes or additions to the recirculation system, treatment equipment, physical structure, or appurtenances. Replacement of the pool or spa shell is considered to be construction of a new facility and shall be processed as such. The installation of new decking is not considered a modification if it is installed in conformance with paragraph 64E-9.006(2)(x), F.A.C., and deck markings are upgraded per subparagraph 64E-9.006(I)(c)3., F.A.C. Resurfacing the pool interior to original non-toxic slip-resistant and smooth specifications or equivalent replacement of equipment are not considered modifications. However, the following items shall be addressed during resurfacing projects: (a) The lip of the gutter must be leveled to within 1/4 inch between the highest and lowest point and the downward slope from the lip to the drain must be maintained as originally designed or increased, but shall not exceed new construction standards. (b) Tile step markings must be installed meeting the requirements of subparagraph 64E-9.006(l)(d)3., F.A.C. (c) Where applicable the slope break marking must be installed meeting the requirements of sub- subparagraph 64E-9.006(1)(c)2.b., F.A.C.; and the safety line must be installed two feet before the marking. (d) Depth markers and NO DIVING markers must be installed in accordance with subparagraph 64E- 9.006(1)(c)3,, F.A.C. (e) The pool ladder must have a three to six inch clearance from the pool wall. New cross braced ladder(s) shall be installed in place of non-cross braced ladder(s) in conformance with 641 -9.006(l)(d)l . during a pool re-surfacing (f) Should resurfacing works affect the step riser heights, no riser shall exceed 12 inches and the intermediate risers shall be made uniform. (g) When fiberglass is used to resurface a pool any existing tile shall not be covered by the fiberglass finish. (h) The County Health Department shall be notified in writing of any proposed pool resurfacing or upgrades to decking at least 10 days prior to commencement. The notification shall include an itemized list of all proposed work that is to be performed, the license number of the contractor selected and shall indicate that all work will meet the requirements of paragraphs 64E-9.005(2)(a) through (g), F.A.C. (i) Upon completion of the work the licensed contractor shall provide the County Health Department a letter bearing their license number which certifies that the work was completed in accordance with paragraphs 64E-9.005(2)(a) through (g), F.A.C. (j) Recessed treads that protrude from the pool wall shall be removed and replaced with a cross braced ladder or reconstructed to meet the requirements of Chapter 64E-9,006(1)(d)2. (3) Approval for pool modifications shall be obtained in the same manner as a construction approval as outlined in subsection 64E-9.005(1), F.A.C., above. (4) Upon completion of an approved modification, written certification signed by the pool contractor, electrical contractor or inspector and signed and sealed by the engineer shall be provided to the department. This shall read as follows: "I certify that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the modification construction and equipment installation has been completed in conformance with the approved plans and documents." (5) Upon completion of a modification, the pool shall not be reopened without authorization from the department. (6) The painting of pools shall not be considered a modification provided the following conditions are met: (a) Only paints designated by the manufacturer as pool paints are used. (b) All step stripes, slope break markers and safety line, and depth and NO DIVING, markings shall be provided, to comply with the applicable subsection 64E-9.005(2), F.A..C. (7) The installation of copper or copper/silver ionization units and ozone generators capable of producing less than a pool water ozone contact concentration of 0.1 milligrams per liter (mg/L). shall not be considered a pool modification provided compliance with the following is met: (a) The ionization or ozone generator unit complies with paragraph 64E-9.007('16)(e), F.A.C. (b) The manufacturer provides one set of signed and sealed engineering; drawings indicating the following: I . The unit does not interfere with the design flow rate. 2. The unit and. the typical installation meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 3. A copper test kit and information regarding the maximum allowed copper and silver level and. the minimum required, chlorine level shall be available to the pool owner. 4. The unit shall meet the requirements of the NSF/ANSI standard 50-2007. (c) At least 7 days before the time of installation, the installer will provide a photocopy of the above drawings and a letter of intent identifying the pool on which the unit is to be installed. (d) Upon completion of the installation, a professional engineer or electrician. licensed in the State of Florida shall provide a letter, to the county health department, indicating the unit was properly installed in accordance with the typical drawings, the National Electrical Code and with local codes. Ru.lemaking Authority 381.006, 514,021 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514.021, 514.025, 514.03, 514,031, 514.05, 514.06 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Formerly I OD-5.134, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5- 24-09. 64E-9.006 Construction Plan Approval Standards (1) Pool Structure -- Pools shall be constricted of concrete or other impervious and structurally rigid material. All pools shall be watertight, free from structural cracks and shall have a nontoxic smooth and slip resistant finish. All materials shall. be installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications unless such specifications violate Chapter 64E-9, F.A.C., rule requirements or the approval criteria of NSF/ANSI Standard 50.2007 or NSF/ANSI Standard 60-2005. (a) Floors and walls shal I be white or light pastel in color and shall have the characteristic of reflecting rather than absorbing light. A minimum 4 inch tile line, each the a iranimw-n size of one inch on all sides, shall be installed at the water line, but shall not exceed 12 inches in height if a dark color is used. Gutter type pools may substitute 2-inch tile, each a minimum size of one inch on all sides, along the pool wall edge of the gutter lip. 1, Any design or logo on the pool floor or walls shall be such that it will not hinder the detection of a human in distress, algae, sediment, or other objects in the pool and written approval must be obtained from the department prior to installation. 2. Pools that are not intended to be utilized for officially sanctioned competition may install lap lane markings provided they meet the following criteria: The markings ,must be 2 to 6 inches wide, they must terminate five feet from the end wall in a "T" with the "T" bar at least 18 incites long, they must be placed at 7 foot intervals on center and be no closer than 4 feet from any side wall, steps or other obstructions. A. 2 to 6 inch wide 18 inch x 18 inch target H may be installed on the pool. wall. Tile used in less than 5 feet of water must be slip resistant. Floating rope lines associated with lap lanes must not obstruct the entrance or exit frorn the pool and are prohibited when the pool is open for general use. 3. One inch square tile may be used if the licensed contractor provides a signed written certification to the approving department engineer that the adhesive used on the one inch. square tile has a manufacturer's tested shear strength of at least 250 psi and the manufacturer has specified the adhesive for use underwater 1 to adhere the type of tile used (vitreous (glass) or ceramic). Tiles shall not have sharp edges exposed that could cause bather injury. (b) Sizing - The bathing load for conventional swimming pools, wading pools, interactive water features, water activity pools less than 24" deep, and special purpose pools shall be computed on the basis of one person per five gallons per minute (gpm) of recirculation flow. The bathing load for spa type pools shall be based on. one person per each 10 square feet of surface area. The filtration system for swimming pools shall be capable of meeting all other requirements of these rules while providing a flowrate of at least one gallon per minute for each living unit at transient facilities and three-fourths gallon per minute at non-transient facilities. Recreational vehicle sites, campsites and boat slips designated for live-aboards shall be considered a transient living unit. For properties with multiple pools, this requirement includes the cumulative total GPM of all swimming pools, excluding spas, wading pools and interactive water features. All other types of projects shall be sized according to the anticipated bathing load and proposed uses. For the purpose of determining minimum pool size only, the pool turnover period used cannot be less than three hours. (c) Dimensions. 1. Walls and corners - All pool walls shall have a clearance of 15 feet perpendicular to the wall (as measured at design water level from gutter lip to gutter lip, or on skimmer pools, from vertical wall to vertical wall). Offset steps, spa coves, spa pools and wading pools are exempt from this clearance requirement. Where interior steps protrude into the pool resulting in less than 15 feet of clearance from any wail such protrusion shall not exceed six feet on any perpendicular line from a tangent to any pool wall from which the steps emanate. The upper part of pool walls in areas five feet deep or less shall be within five degrees of vertical for a minimum depth of two and one-half feet from which point the wall may join the floor with a maximum radius equal to the difference between the pool depth and two and one-half feet. The upper part of pool walls in areas over five feet deep shall be within five degrees of vertical for a minimum depth equal to the pool water depth minus two and one-half feet from which point the wall may join the floor with a maximum radius of two and one-half feet. Corners shall be a minimum. 90 degree angle. The corner intersections of walls which protrude or angle into the pool water area shall be rounded with a minimum radius of two inches. This radius shall be continued through the top of the gutter edge; chamfering is allowed. Pool coping shall not overhang into the pool more than one and a half inches. 2. Pool Floor Slope and Slope Transition - The radius of curvature between the floor and walls is excluded from these requirements. Multiple floor levels in pools are prohibited, a. Floor slope shall be uniform. The floor slope shall be a maximum one foot vertical in ten feet horizontal and a minimum of one foot vertical in forty feet horizontal in areas five feet deep or less. The floor slope shall be a maximum one foot vertical in three feet horizontal in areas more than five feet deep. b. Any transition in floor slope shall occur at a minimum of five feet of water depth. A slope transition must have a 2 to 6 inch wide dark contrasting tile marking across the bottom and must extend up both sides of the pool at the transition point. The marking shall be continuous except for necessary grouting. A slope transition must have a safety line mounted by use of recessed cup anchors, two feet before the contrasting marking, towards the shallow end. The safety line shall have visible floats at maximum seven foot intervals. 3. Depths and Markings - The minimum water depth shall be three feet in shallow areas and four feet in deep areas. a. Permanent depth markings followed by the appropriate full or abbreviated words "FEET", "FT'" or "INCHES", "IN", shall be installed in minimum four inch high numbers and letters on a contrasting background. Depth markers shall indicate the actual pool depth, within three inches, at normal operating water level when measured three feet from the pool wall. Symmetrical pool designs with the deep point at the center may be allowed provided a dual marking system is used which indicates the depth at the wail and at the deep point. b. At a minimum, the markings shall be located on both sides of the pool at the shallow end, slope break, deep end wall and deep point (if located more than five feet from the deep end wall). Depth markings shall be legible from inside the pool and also from the pool deck. The maximum perimeter distance between depth markings is 25 feet. Pool size and geometry may necessitate additional depth marking placements about all sides of the pool to meet this requirement. When a curb is provided, the depth markings shall be installed on the inside and outside or top of the pool curb. When a pool curb is not provided, the depth markings shall be located on the inside vertical wall at or above the water level and on the edge of the deck within 2 feet of the pool water. When open type gutter designs are utilized, depth markers shall be located on the back of the gutter wall. c. When deck level perimeter overflow systems are utilized, additional depth marking signs shall be posted nearby or placed on adjacent fencing or walls and the size shall be increased so they are recognizable from inside the swimming pool. Alternatively the depth markers may be placed at the top of the pool wall just under the water level. Depth markers placed on the pool deck shall be within 3 feet of the water. d. Those areas of the pool that are not part of an approved diving bowl shall have dark contrasting tile four inch high "NO DIVING" markings installed along the perimeter of the pool on the top of the pool curb or deck within two feet of the pool water with a maximum perimeter distance of 25 feet between markings- A 6-'inch tile with a 4-inch or larger red, international "NO DIVING" symbol may be substituted for the "NO D1V1NG" markings. e. All markings shall be tile, except that pools constructed, of fiberglass, thermoplastic or stainless steel may substitute other type markings when it can be shown that said markings are permanent a.n,d will not fade over time. This exemption does not extend to concrete pools that are coated with fiberglass. Tile alternative examples include stone or manufactured. plaques with engraved or sandblasted numbers and characters with permanent paint. Permanent appliquEs niay be used for .fiberglass, thermoplastic or stainless steel pools. All markings installed on horizontal surfaces shall have a slip resistant finish. Markings shall be flush with the surrounding area where placed and recessed if necessary to provide a smooth finish that will avoid creation of an injury hazard to bathers. Pools that are not conducive to tile can employ other equivalent mirkings as stated above. (d) Access- All pools shall have a means of access every 75 feet of pool perimeter with a minimum of two, located so as to serve both ends of the pool. In addition, an access point shall be provided at the deep portion, if the deep portion is not at one end of the pool, When the deep portion of the pool is over 30 feet wide both sides of this area shall have a means of access, Access shall consist of ladders, stairs, recessed treads or swimouts and may be used in. combination. All treads shall have a slip resistant surface. 1 _ Ladders - Ladders shall be of the cross-braced type and shall be constructed of corrosion resistant materials and be securely anchored into the pool deck. Clearance between the ladder and pool wall shall be between three to six inches. Ladders shall extend at least 28 inches and no more than 40 inches above the pool deck. Ladder bottom braces shall have intact end caps or bumpers that rest firmly against the pool wall. The top rung of the ladder shall be at or below the water level on open gutter pools and not more than 12 inches below the deck or curb top on all other type pools. 2, Recessed. Treads - Recessed treads shall be installed flush with the wall and shall be a minimum five inches wide, 10 inches long, with a maximum vertical distance of 12 inches between treads. 3. Stairs - Stairs shall have a minimum tread width of 10 inches and a maximum width of 48 inches for a minimum tread length of 24 inches and a. maximum riser height of 10 inches. Treads and risers between the top and bottom treads shall be uniform to within 1/2 inch in width and. height. The riser heights shall be measured at the marked step edges and the differences in elevation shall be considered the riser heights. The front 3/4 to 2 inches of the tread and the top 2 inches of the riser shall be tile, dark in color, contrasting with the interior of the pool. Tile shall be slip resistant. Bullnose file that is slip resistant may be used when the 3/4tbs inch segment is placed on the tread or horizontal surface and the 2 inch segment is placed on the riser or vertical surface. Where the gutter is used as the top step, the tile on the gutter for the width of the steps shall be slip resistant.. Vinyl liner and fiberglass pools may use other material for the step edge marking, provided the material is pennanent, permanently secured, dark in color, non-fading, and slip resistant. 4, Switnouts - Swimouts shall extend 18 to 24 inches back from the pool wall, shall be 4 to 5 feet wide, shall be a maximum of 12 inches below the deck, unless stairs are provided in the swiniout, and shall be located only in areas of the pool greater than 5 feet deep. Pools that do not utilize a continuous perimeter overflow system must provide a wall return inlet in the swimou.t for circulation. A permanent dark contrasting colored band of tile shall be installed at the intersection of the pool wall and the swimout and must extend two inches on the horizontal and vertical surfaces. Tile must be slip resistant. Bullnose tile may be substituted and installed in accordance with subparagraph 64E-9.006('l)(d)3., F.A,C., above, 5, Handrails and Grabrails --- Handrails shall be provided for all stairs, shall be anchored in the bottom step and the deck, Where "figure 4" deck mounted type handrails are used, they shall be anchored in the deck and extend laterally to any point vertically above the bottom step. Grabrails must be mounted in the pool deck at each side of recessed steps. Handrails and grabrails shall extend between 28 and 40-inches above the step edge and deck, 10 C7 ?I 1 1 6. Permanent or portable steps, ramps, handrails, lifts, or other devices designed to accommodate handicapped individuals in swimming pools may be provided. Lifts mounted into the pool deck shall have a minimum four foot wide deck behind the lift mount. (e) The pool water area shall be unobstructed by any type structure unless justified by engineering design as a part of the recirculation system. Engineering design and material specifications shall show that such structures will not endanger the pool patron, can be maintained in a sanitary condition and will not create a problem for sanitary maintenance of any part of the pool, pool water, or pool facilities. Structures in accord with the above shall not be located in a diving bowl area or within 15 feet of any pool wall. 1. Stairs, ladders and ramps, necessary for entrance/exit from the pool are not considered obstructions. 2. Underwater seat benches may be installed in areas less than five feet deep. Bench seats must be 14 to 18 inches wide and must have a dark contrasting tile marking on the seat edge extending two inches on the horizontal and vertical surface. Tile shall be slip resistant. Bullnose file may be substituted and installed in accordance with subparagraph 64E-9.006(l)(d)3., F.A.C. Vinyl liner, stainless steel, and fiberglass pools may use other material for the bench edge marking as detailed in 64E-9.006(i)(c)3.e. above, provided the material is permanently secured, dark in color, non-fading, and slip resistant. Benches shall not protrude into the 15 foot clearance requirement of subparagraph 64E-9.006(T)(c)] , F.A.C. (f) The vertical clearance above the pool deck shall be at least seven feet. (g) Diving Areas - Diving facilities shall meet the minimum requirements of the'FINA dimensions for diving facilities in accordance with the 2005-2009 FINA Handbook. 1. Diving boards or platforms with heights of less than the established standard shall meet the dimensional requirements of the next greater height. 2. Diving boards, platforms and ladders shall have a nonabsorbent, slip resistant finish and be of sufficient strength to safely carry the anticipated loads. Diving equipment one meter and greater shall have guard rails which extend to the edge of the pool wall. All diving boards over 21 inches from the deck shall be provided with a ladder. Diving boards or platforms shall not be installed on curved walls where the wall enters into the defined rectangular diving area specified in this section. Adjacent platform and diving boards shall be parallel. 3. The location of pool ladders shall be such that the distance from the ladder to any point on, a diving board or platform centerline is not less than the plummet to side wall dimension (b) indicated in the FINA standards. Trampoline type diving facilities are prohibited. 4. Diving targets may be installed in accordance with FINA standards. (2) Pool Appurtenances. (a) Decks and Walkways - Wooden decks and walkways are prohibited. 1. Pool wet decks shall have a minimum unobstructed width of four feet around the perimeter of the pool, pool curb, ladders, handrails, diving boards, diving towers, and slides, shall be constructed of concrete or other nonabsorbent material having a smooth slip resistant finish and shall be uniformly sloped at a minimum of two percent to a maximum of four percent away from the pool or to deck drains to prevent standing water, Textured deck .finishes that provide pitting and crevices of more than three-sixteenths inch (3/16") deep that accumulate soil are prohibited. If settling or weathering occurs that would cause standing water, the original slopes shall be restored or corrective drains installed. When a curb is provided, the deck shall not be more than 10 inches below the top of the curb. Wet deck area finishes shall be designed for such use and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Traffic barriers shall be provided as needed so that parked vehicles do not extend over the deck area. Walkways shall be provided between the pool and the sanitary facilities, and shall be constructed of concrete or other nonabsorbent material having a smooth slip resistant finish for the first 15 feet of the walkway measured from the nearest pool water's edge. A hose bibb with a vacuum breaker shall be provided to allow the deck to be washed down with potable water. 2. Ten percent of the deck along the pool perimeter may be obstructed. Obstructions shall have a wet deck area behind or through them, with the near edge of the walk within 15 feet of the water except approved slide obstructions shall have the near edge of the walk within 35 feet of the water. These obstructions must be protected by a barrier or must be designed to discourage patron access. When an obstruction exists in multiple areas around the pool the minimum distance between obstructions shall be four feet. 3. Food or drink service facilities shall not be located within 12 feet of the water's edge. (b) Bridges and overhead obstructions over the pool shall be designed so they will not introduce any contamination to the pool water. The minimum height of the bridge or obstruction shall be at least eight 11 feet from the bottom of the pool and at least four feet above the surface of the pool. Minimum 42 inch high handrails shall be provided along each side of the bridge. The walking surfaces shall be constructed of concrete or other nonabsorbent material having a smooth slip resistant finish. Pool coping shall not , overhang into the pool more than one and a half inches. (c) Lighting - Artificial lighting shall be provided at all swimming pools which are to be used at night or which do not have adequate natural lighting so that all portions of the pool, including the bottom, may be readily seen without glare. ' 1. Outdoor pool lighting - Lighting shall provide a minimum of three foot candles of illumination at the pool water surface and the pool wet deck surface- Underwater lighting shall be a minimum of one-half watt per square foot of pool water surface area. 2. Indoor pool lighting - Lighting shall provide a minimum of 10 foot candles of illumination at the pool , water surface and the pool wet deck surface. Underwater lighting shall be a minimum of eight-tenths watt per square foot of pool surface area. 3. Underwater lighting - Underwater lighting shall utilize transformers and low voltage circuits with each underwater light being grounded. The maximum voltage for each light shalt be 15 volts and the maximum ' incandescent lamp size shall be 300 watts. The location of the underwater lights shall be such that the underwater illumination is as uniform as possible and shall not be less than 18 inches below the normal operating water level determined by the centerline of the skimmer or top lip of the gutter. All underwater lights which depend upon submersion for safe operation shall have protection from overheating when not submerged. Underwater lighting requirements can be waived when, the overhead lighting provides at least 15 foot candles of illumination at the pool water surface and pool wet deck surface. Alternative lighting systems which use 15 volts or less, or use no electricity in the pool or on the pool deck, such as LED, (light , emitting diode) or fiber optic systems, may be utilized if the applicant demonstrates to reasonable certainty that the system development has advanced to the point where the department is convinced that the pool illumination is equal to the requirements in subparagraph 1. and 2. above, 4. Overhead wiring - Overhead service wiring shall not pass within an area extending a distance of 10 , feet horizontally away from the inside edge of the pool walls, diving structures, observation stands, towers, or platforms. Allowances for overhead conductor clearances to pools that meet the safety standards in the National Electrical Code may used instead. (d) Electrical Equipment and Wiring - Electrical equipment wiring and installation including the , grounding of pool components shall conform with the National Fire Protection Association 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), 2008 Edition, effective August 1.5, 2007, and with applicable local codes. The NEC is incorporated by reference in these rules and is available from the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy Massachusetts. A signature shall be provided on form D1.1916 from the electrical contractor or the ' electrical inspector certifying e€ compliance with the National Electrical Code. Where emergency cut-off switches are provided on existing or new pools, the alarm and signage specified in 64E-9.010(16) for spa pools shall be provided within 180 days of effective date of this rule. (e) Equipment Enclosures, Area or Rooms -- Equipment designated by the manufacturer for outdoor use , may be located in an equipment area, all other equipment must be located. in an equipment room or enclosure. Plastic pipe subject to a period of prolonged sunlight exposure must be coated to protect it from ultraviolet light degradation. An equipment area shall be surrounded with a fence at least four feet high on all sides not confined by a building or equivalent structure. A self-closing and self-latching gate with a ' locking device shall be provided if necessary for access. An equipment room shall be protected on at least three sides and overhead. The fourth side may be a gate, fence, or open if otherwise protected from unauthorized entrance. Any fence or gate installed shall use members spacing that shall not allow passage , of a 4 inch diameter sphere. An equipt-,nent enclosure shall be lockable or otherwise protected from unauthorized access. This access security shall be installed on all pool equipment areas by one year from the effective date of this rule for those that do not presently have a similar level of security. The equipment enclosure, area or room floor shall be of concrete or other nonabsorbent material having a smooth slip resistant finish and shall have positive drainage, including a sump pump if necessary. Ancillary equipment, such as a. heater, not contained in an equipment enclosure or room shall necessitate an equipment area as described above, which shall also be installed by one year from the effective date of this rule. 1 _ Ventilation and Access - Equipment enclosures or rooms shall have either forced draft or cross ' ventilation. All below grade equipment rooms shall have a stairway access with forced draft. ventilation. or a fully louvered door and powered intake within 6 inches of the floor. Where stairway access is not necessary to carry heavy items into the below grade room or vault, a "ship's ladder" may be used if specified by the ' 12 design engineer who must consider anticipated workload including equipment removal; and the ladder slope, tread height and width; and construction material of the ladder. The opening to the equipment room or area shall be a minimum of three feet by six feet and shall provide easy access to the equipment. A hose bibb with vacuum breaker shall be located in the equipment room or area. 2. Size and Lighting - The size of the equipment enclosure, room or area shall provide working space to perform routine operations. Clearance shall be provided for all equipment as prescribed by the manufacturer to allow normal maintenance operation and removal without disturbing other piping or equipment. Equipment enclosures, rooms or areas shall not be used for storage of chemicals emitting corrosive fumes or for storage of other items to the extent that entrance to the room for inspection or operation of the equipment is impaired. In rooms with fixed ceilings, the minimum height shall be seven feet. Equipment enclosures, rooms or areas shall be lighted to provide 30 foot candles of illumination at floor level. (f) Sanitary Facilities - Swimming pools with a bathing load of 20 persons or less may utilize a unisex restroom. Pools with bathing loads of 40 persons or less may utilize two unisex restrooms or meet the requirement on the chart below. Unisex restrooms shall meet all the requirements for materials, drainage and signagc as indicated in subparagraphs 64E-9.006(2)(f)2. through 7. below. Each shall include a water closet, a diaper change table, a urinal, and a lavatory. Pools with a bathing load larger than 40 persons shall provide separate sanitary facilities labeled for each sex. The entry doors of all restrooms must be located within a 200 foot walking distance of the nearest water's edge of each pool served by the facilities. 1. Fixtures shall be provided as indicated on the following chart. - The fixture count on this chart is deemed to be adequate for the pool and pool deck area that is up to three times the area of the pool surface provided. Size. of Pool (square feet) Required Fixture Count Men' s Restroom Women' s Restroom Urinals WC Lavatory WC Lavatory 0-2500 1 1 1 1 1 2501-5000 2 1 1 5 1 5001-7500 2 2 2 6 2 7501-10000 3 2 3 8 3 An additional set of fixtures shall be provided in the men's restroom for every 7,500 square feet or major fraction thereof for pools greater than 10,000 square feet. Women's restrooms must have a ratio of three to two water closets provided for women to the combined total of water closets and urinals provided for men. Lavatory counts shall be equal. 2. Outside access to facilities shall be provided for bathers at outdoor pools. Where the restrooms are located within an adjacent building and the restroom doors do not open to the outside, the restroom doors shall be within 50 feet of the buildings exterior door. If the restroams are not visible from any portion of the pool deck, signs shall be posted showing directions to the facilities. These directions shall be legible from any portion. of the pool deck and the letters shall be a minimum of one inch high. 3. Sanitary facility floors shall be constructed of concrete or other nonabsorbent materials and shall have a smooth slip resistant finish. and shall slope to floor drains. Carpets, duckboards and footbaths are prohibited. The intersection between the floor and walls must be coved where either floor or wall is not made of waterproof materials such as tile or vinyl. 4. Poolside sanitary facilities are not required if all living units are within a 200 foot horizontal radios of the nearest water's edge, are not over three stories in beight, unless serviced by an elevator, and are each equipped with private sanitary facilities. 5. A hose bibb with vacuum breaker shall be provided in or within 25 feet of each restroom to allow for ease of cleaning. 6. When multiple fixture sets are required and separate facilities are provided for each sex the fixtures used in ancillary family style restrooms can be used to meet the requirements of subparagraph 64E-9.006 (2)('1)l, F-A-C. 7. One diaper changing tables shall be provided at each restroom. Diaper changing tables are not required at restrooms where all pools served are restricted to adult use only. Swim diapers are recommended for use by children that are not toilet trained- Persons that are ill with diarrhea can not enter the pool. 13 (g) Rinse shower - A minimum of one rinse shower shall be provided on the pool deck of all outdoor pools within 20 feet of the nearest pool water's edge. (h) All public pools shall be surrounded by a minimum 48 inch high fence or other substantial barrier approved by the department. The fence shall be continuous around the perimeter of the pool area that is not otherwise blocked or obstructed by adjacent buildings or structures and shall adjoin with itself or abut to the adjacent members. Access through the barrier or fence from dwelling units such as homes, apartments, motel rooms, and hotel rooms, shall be through self-closing self-latching lockable gates of 48 inch minimal height from the floor or ground with the latch located a minimum of 54 inches from the bottom. of the gate or at least 3 inches below the top of the gate on the pool side. If the self closing self-latching gate is also self-locking and is operated by a key lock, electronic opener, or integral combination lock, then the operable parts of such locks or openers shall be 34 inches minimum and 48 inches maximum above the finished floor or ground. Doored access points from public rooms such as lobbies or club houses need not be through gates. Gates shall open outward away from the pool area. A latched, lockable gate shall be placed in the fence within ten feet of the closest point between the pool and the equipment area for service access. Instead of a fence, permanent natural or man made features such as bulkheads, canals, lakes, navigable waterways, etc,, adjacent to a pool may be permitted as a barrier when approved by the department. When evaluating such barrier features, the department may perform onsite inspections, and review evidence, such as surveys, aerial photographs, water management agency standards and specifications, and any other similar documentation to verify at minimum, the following: the barrier feature is not subject to natural changes, deviations, or alterations and is capable of providing an equivalent level of protection as that provided by a structure, and the barrier feature clearly impedes, prohibits or restricts access to the pool. Screened pool enclosures must be hardened on the bottom three feet. Fencing consideration shall be given to the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) Publication No. 362, March 2005, guidelines available from CPSC_gov; or the Florida Building Code, 2007 with 2009 amendments, sections 424.117.1.1 - 424.2,17,1,8 Safety Covers that comply with ASTM Standard F1346-91 (Reapproved 2003), titled Safety Covers and Labeling Requirements for All Covers for Swimming Pools, Spas and Hot Tubs, and available from ASTM.org , do not satisfy this requirement. Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514.021, 514.03, 514.031, 514.05, 514.06 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Formerly IOD-5.'135, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04,5-24-09. 64E-9.007 Recirculation and Treatment System Requirements (1) Recirculation and treatment equipment such as filters, recessed automatic surface skimmers, ionizers, ozone generators, disinfection feeders and chlorine generators must be tested and approved using the NSF/ANSI Standard 50-2007, Circulation System Components and Related Materials for Swimming Pool, Spas/Hot Tubs, dated April, 2007, which is incorporated by reference in these rules. The standard and a list of approved devices is available from www.NSF.org. If standards do not exist for a specific product, the manufacturer must work with. NSF or other American National Standards Institute (ANSI) approved agency to develop such standards. (2) The recirculation system shall be designed to provide a minimum of four turnovers of the pool volume per day. Pools that are less than 1000 square feet at health clubs shall be required to provide eight turnovers per day. (3) The design pattern of recirculation flow shall be 100 percent through the main drain piping and 100 percent through the perimeter overflow system or 60 percent through the skimmer system. (a) Perimeter overflow gutters - The lip of the gutter shall be uniformly level with a maximum tolerance of one-fourth, inch, between the high and low areas. The bottom of the gutter shall be level or slope to the drains. The spacing between drains shall not exceed 10 feet for two inch drains or 15 feet for two and one- half inch drains, unless hydraulically justified by the design engineer. Gutters may be eliminated along pool edges for no more than fifteen feet and this shall not exceed 10% of the perimeter (at least 90% of the perimeter shall be guttered). In areas where gutters are eliminated, handholds shall be provided within nine inches of the water surface. Handhold design shall be approved by the department prior to construction. The gutter lip shall be tiled with a minimum of 2 inch tile on the pool wall, each a minimum size of one inch on all sides, except that stainless steel gutters are exempt from this requirement. 1. Either recessed type or open type gutters shall be used, Special designs can be approved provided they are within limits of sound engineering practice. Recessed type gutters shall be at least four inches deep and 14 1 1 1 1 four inches wide, and no part of the recessed gutter shall be visible from a position directly above the gutter sighting vertically down the edge of the deck or curb. Open type gutters shall be at least six inches deep and 12 inches wide. The back vertical wall of the gutter shall be tiled with glazed tile, each a minimum size of one inch on all sides. This tile shall be smooth and easily cleanable. The gutter shall slope downward 2 inches, plus or minus 1/4 inch, from the lip to the drains. When open type gutters are located at pool steps and the gutter is used as a step tread, the gutter slope may be reduced to 1 inch in the area of the steps, and this tread shall be tiled with slip resistant tile. The back of the gutter drains shall be located within 3/4 inch of the back vertical wall of the gutter, where the gutter is deepest and shall be flush with the surrounding area or be recessed no more than 3/8 inch. 2. All gutter systems shall discharge into a collector tank. 3. The department shall waive the requirements of file on stainless steel gutter systems when it can be shown that the surfaces at the waterline and back of the gutter are smooth and easily cleanable. (b) Recessed Automatic Surface Skimmers -- Recessed automatic surface skimmers may be utilized when the pool water surface area is 1,000 square feet or less excluding offset stairs and swimouts and the width of the pool is not over 20 feet, 1. The recessed automatic surface skimmer piping system shall be designed to carry 60 percent of the pool total design flow rate with each skimmer carrying a minimum 30 gallons per minute. One skimmer for every 400 square feet or fraction thereof of pool water surface area shall be provided. 2. Prevailing wind direction and the pool outline shall be considered by the designer in the selection of skimmer locations and the location of skimmers shall be such that the interference of adjacent inlets and skimmers is minimized. Recessed automatic surface skimmers shall be installed so that there is no protrusion into the pool water area. The deck or curb shall provide for a handhold around the entire pool perimeter and shall not be located more than nine inches above the mid point of the opening of the skimmer. 3. Recessed automatic surface skimmers may be installed with an equalizer valve and an. equalizer line when the skimmer piping system is connected directly to pump suction. If installed, the equalizer valve shall be a spring loaded vertical check valve which will not allow direct suction on the equalizer line. Float valves are prohibited. The equalizer line inlet shall be installed at least one foot below the normal pool water level and the equalizer line inlet shall be protected by an ASME/ANSI Al 12.19.8-2007 compliant cover/grate. The equalizer line shall be sized to handle the expected flow with a two inch minimum line size. For existing pools, within 180 days of effective date of this rule, skimmer equalizer lines shall be permanently plugged or ASME/ANSI At 12.1.9.8-2007 compliant covers/grates shall be installed at the inlet. 4. A wall inlet fitting shall be provided directly across from each skimmer. 5. A minimum 6-inch water line the shall be provided on all pools with automatic skimmer systems, each a minimum size of one inch on all sides. Glazed tile that is smooth and easily cleanable shall be utilized. (4) Pumps - If the pump or suction piping is located above the water level of the pool, the pump shall be self-priming. Pumps that take suction prior to filtration shall be equipped with a hair and lint strainer. The recirculation pump shall be selected to provide the required recirculation flow against a minimum total dynamic head of 60 feet unless hydraulically justified by the design engineer. Vacuum filter systems pumps shall provide at least 50 feet of total dynamic head. Should the total dynamic head required not be appropriate for a given project, the design engineer shall provide an alternative. (5) Filters - Filters sized to handle the required recirculation flow shall be provided. (a) Filter capacities - The maximum filtration rate in gallons per minute per square foot of filter area shall be: fifteen (twenty if so approved utilizing the procedure stated in subsection 6413-9.007(l), F.A.C.) for high rate sand filters, three for rapid sand filters, three-hundred-seventy-five thousandths for pleated cartridge filters and two for Diatomaceous Earth (D.E.) type filters. (b) Filter Appurtenances. 1. Pressure filter systems shall be equipped with an air relief valve, influent and effluent pressure gauges with minimum face size of two inches reading 0-60 pounds per square inch (psi), and a sight glass when a backwash line is required. 2. Vacuum filter systems shall be equipped with a vacuum gauge which has a two inch face and reads from 0-30 inches of mercury. 3. Precoat - A precoat pot or collector tank shall be provided for D.E. type systems. (c) Filter tanks and elements - The filter area shall be determined on the basis of effective filtering surfaces with no allowance given for areas of impaired filtration, such as broad supports, folds, or portions which may bridge. 15 Fil' D.E. filter elements shall have a minimum one inch clear spacing between elements up to a four square foot effective area. The spacing between filter elements shall increase one-eighth inch for each additional square foot of filter area or fraction thereof above an effective filter area of four square feet. All cartridges used in public pool filters shall be permanently marked with the manufacturer's name, pore size and area in square feet of filter material. All cartridges with end caps shall have the permanent markings on one and cap. Vacuum filter tanks shall have coved intersections between. the wall and the floor and the tank floor shall slope to the filter tank drain. The D.E. falter tank and elements shall be installed such that the recirculation flow draw down does not expose the elements to the atmosphere whenever only the main drain valve is open or only the surface overflow gutter system valve is open. (6) Piping - All plastic pipe used in the recirculation system shall be imprinted with the manufacturer's name and the NSF-pw logo for potable water applications. Size, schedule, and type of pipe shall be included on the drawings. (7) Valves -- Return lines, main drain lines, and surface overflow system lines, shall each have proportioning valves. (8) Flow Velocity -- Pressure piping shall not exceed 10 feet per second, except that precoat lines with higher velocities may be used when necessary for agitation. purposes. The flow velocity in suction piping shall not exceed six feet per second except that flow velocities up to 10 feet per second in filter assembly headers will be acceptable. Main drain systems and surface overflow systems which discharge to collector tanks shall be sized with a maximum flow velocity of three feet per second. The filter and vacuuming system shall have the necessary valves and piping to allow filtering to pool, vacuuming to waste, vacuuming to filter, complete drainage of the filter tank, backwashing for sand and pressure D,E. type filters and precoat recirculation for D.E. type filters. (9) Inlets - All inlets shall be adjustable with wall type inlets being directionally adjustable and floor type inlets having a means of flow adjustment. Floor inlets shall be designed and installed such that they do not protrude above the pool floor and all inlets shall be designed and installed so as not to constitute sharp edges or protrusions hazardous to pool bathers. Floor inlets for vinyl liner and fiberglass pools, shall be smooth with no sharp edges, and, shall not extend more than 3/8 inches above the pool floor. Wall inlets shall be installed a minimum of 12 inches below the normal operating water level unless precluded by the pool depth or intended for a specific acceptable purpose. (a) Pools 30 feet in width or less, with wall inlets only shall have enough inlets such that the inlet spacing does not exceed 20 feet based on the pool water perimeter. (b) Pools 30 feet in width or less with floor inlets only shall have a number of inlets provided such that the spacing between adjacent inlets does not exceed 20 feet and the spacing between inlets and adjacent walls does not exceed 10 feet. (c) A combination of wall and floor inlets may be used in. pools 30 feet in width or less only if requirements of paragraph (a) or (b) are fully met. (d) Pools greater than 30 feet in width, shall have either floor inlets only, or a combination of floor inlets and wall inlets. Pools with floor inlets only shall have a number of floor inlets provided such that the spacing between adjacent inlets does not exceed 20 feet and the spacing between. inlets and an adjacent wall does not exceed 10 feet. (e) Pools greater than 30 feet in width. with a combination of wall and floor inlets shall, have the number of wall inlets such that the maximum spacing between the wall inlets is 20 feet and floor inlets are provided for the pool water area beyond a 15 feet perpendicular distance from all walls. The number of floor inlets shall be such that the spacing between adjacent inlets does not exceed 20 feet and the distance from a floor inlet and. an adjacent wall does not exceed 25 feet. (f) The flow rate through. each inlet shall not exceed 20 gpm. (10) Main Drain Outlets - All pools shall be provided with an outlet at the deepest point. (a) The depth at the outlet must not deviate more than three inches from the side wall depth marking unless designed and approved as such. and dual depth markings are used, (b) Outlets must be covered by a secured grating which requires the use ofa tool to remove and whose open area is such that the maximum velocity of water passing through the openings does not exceed one and one-half feet per second at 100 percent of the design recirculation flow. (c) Multiple outlets, equally spaced from the pool side walls and from each other, shall be installed in pools where the deep portion of the pool is greater than 30 feet in width. (d) If the area is subject to high ground water, the pool shall be designed to withstand hydraulic uplift or shall be provided with hydrostatic relief devices. (e) The main drain outlet shall he connected to a collector tank. The capacity of the collector tank shall be at least one minute of the recirculated flow unless justified by the design engineer. Vacuum filter tanks are considered collector tanks. (f) All pools built without a main drain collector tank must be retrofitted with, a properly sized and piped 16 1 1 1 1 1 collector tank as described in the collector tank definition, the first paragraph of 64E-9.005, 64E-9-007(8), and. 64E-9.007(10) on or before the following dates to eliminate direct suction through the main drain. 1. For all pools, including wading pools, except spa type pools, with a main drain grate water depth of 4 feet or less, construction shall be completed on or before one year from the effective date of this rule; for all spa type pools built before 1977, retrofit by July 1, 2010, for all spa type pools built between 1977 and 1986, retrofit by July 1, 2011, for all spa type pools built between 1986 and 1995, retrofit by July 1, 2012 and for all other pools, retrofit by July 1, 2013, 2. All existing public pools with direct suction main drains shall install as soon as possible, but in no case later than 180 days after the effective date of this rule, a main drain cover/grate that meets both the ASME/ANSI Al 12.19.8-2007 standard for drain covers/grates and the main drain cover/grate 1.5 feet per second water velocity requirement of this rule. 3. A modification permit shall be obtained prior to installation of the collector tank. 4. Pools that cannot be retrofitted by these dates shall be closed on or before these dates. (g) Main drain covers/grates installed after the effective date of this rule shall comply with the requirements of ASME/ANSI AI 12.19.8-2007 and the water velocity requirement of this rule. (11) An automatic and manual water makeup control must be provided to maintain the water level at the lip of the overflow gutter or at the mouth of the recessed automatic surface skimmers and must discharge through an air gap into a fill pipe or collector tank. Over the rim fill spouts are prohibited, (12) Cleaning system- A portable or plumbed in vacuum cleaning system shall be provided. All vacuum pumps shall be equipped with hair and lint strainers. Recirculation or separate vacuum pumps shall not be used for vacuuming purposes when in excess of 3 horsepower. When the system is plumbed in, the vacuum fittings shall be located to allow cleaning the pool with a 50 foot maximum length of hose. Vacuum fittings shall be mounted no more than 15 inches below the water level, flush with the pool walls, and shall be provided with a spring loaded safety cover which shall be in place at all times. Bag type cleaners which operate as ejectors on potable water supply pressure must be protected by a vacuum breaker. Cleaning devices shall not be used while the pool is open to bathers. (13) Rate of flow indicators - A rate of flow indicator, reading in gpm, shall be installed on the return line. The rate of flow indicator shall be properly sized for the design flow rate and shall be capable of measuring from one- half to at least one and one-half times the design flow rate. The clearances upstream and downstream from the rate of flow indicator shall comply with manufacturer's installation specifications. (14) Heaters -- Pool heaters shall comply with. nationally recognized standards acceptable to the department and to the design engineer. Pools equipped with heaters shall have a fixed thermometer mounted in the pool recirculation line downstream from the heater outlet. Thermometers mounted on heater outlets do not meet this requirement. A sketch of any proposed heater installation including valves, thermometer, pipe sizes, and material specifications shall be submitted to the department and authorization obtained prior to installation. Piping and influent, effluent and bypass valves which allow isolation or removal of the heater from the system shall be provided. Materials used in solar and other heaters shall be non-toxic and acceptable for use with potable water. Heaters shall not prevent the attainment of the required turnover rate. Heaters shall comply with applicable heating codes. Beater replacement or addition meeting the provisions of this section does not constitute a modification. (15) Pool waste water disposal - Pool waste water shall be discharged through an air gap; disposal shall be to sanitary sewers, storm sewers, drain fields, or by other means, in accordance with local municipal and building official requirements including obtaining all necessary permits. Each waste line shall have a unique air gap. Waste lines from different sources (e.g. pool, spa, overfill, sump pump) shall not be tied together, but may discharge into a common sump or receptacle after the air gap. Disposal of water from pools using D.E. powder shall be accomplished through separation tanks which are equipped with air bleed valves, bottom drain lines, and isolation valves, or through a settling tank with final disposal being acceptable to local authorities. D.E. separator tanks shall have a capacity as rated by the manufacturer, equal to the square footage of the filter system. All lines shall be sized to handle the expected flow. There shall not be a direct physical connection between any waste or drain line from a pool or recirculation system and any a sewer line. Waste D.E. powder shall be collected and. disposed of in a manner acceptable to local authorities and solid waste collectors. (16) Disinfection and pH adjustment shall be added to the pool recirculation flow using automatic feeders meeting the requirement of NSF/ANSI Standard 50-2007. All chemicals shall be fed into the return line after the pump, heater and filters, unless the feeder was designed by the manufacturer and approved by the NSF to feed to the collector tank or to the suction side of the pump. Feeding chlorinated isocyanurates disinfectant is prohibited in spas, wading pools and interactive water features, and these existing feeders 17 shall be replaced with non-isocyan.urate chlorinators, or equivalent, with a pH adjustment feeder on or before June 1, 2011. Dual or multiuse feeders can be used if approved for and feeding an acceptable rate of alternate disinfectant. (a) Gas chlorination - When gas chlorination is utilized, the chlorinator shall be capable of continuously feeding a chlorine dosage of six mg(L to the recirculated flow of the filtration system. The application point for chlorine shall be located in the return line downstream of the filter, recirculation pump, heater, and flow meter, and as far as possible from the pool. 1. Gas chlorinators shall be located in above grade rooms and in areas which are inaccessible to unauthorized persons. a. Chlorine rooms shall have: continuous forced draft ventilation capable of a minimum of one air change per minute with an exhaust at floor level to the outside, a minimum of 30 foot candles of illumination with the switch located outside and the door shall open out and shall not be located adjacent to the filter room entrance or the pool deck. A shatter-proof gas tight inspection window shall be provided. b. Chlorine areas shall have a roof and shall be enclosed by a chain-link type fence at least six feet high to allow ventilation and prevent vandalism. 2. A gas mask, or a self-contained breathing apparatus, approved for use in chlorine gas contaminated air, shall be provided and shall be located out of the area of possible contamination. 3. When booster pumps are used with the chlorinator, the pump shall use recirculated pool water supplied via the recirculation filtration system. The booster pump shall be electrically interlocked with the recirculation pump to prevent the feeding of chlorine when the recirculation pump is not operating. 4. A means of weighing chlorine containers shall be provided. When 150 pound cylinders are used, platform type scales shall be provided and shall be capable of weighing a minimum of two full cylinders at one time, The elevation of the scale platform shall be within two inches of the adjacent floor level, and the facilities shall be constructed to allow easy placement of full cylinders on the scales. 5. Each cylinder shall be secured at all times, with 150 pound cylinders maintained in an. upright position. A protective cap shall be in place at all. times when the cylinder is not connected to the chlorinator. (b) Hypo halogenation and Electrolytic chlorine generators - The hypohalogenation type feeder and electrolytic chlorine generators shall be adjustable from zero to full range. A rate of flow indicator is required on erosion type feeders. The feeders shall be capable of continuously feeding a dosage of b mg/L to the minimum required turnover flow rate of the filtration systems. Solution feeders shall be capable of feeding the above dosage using a ten percent sodium hypochlorite solution, or five percent calcium hypochlorite solution, whichever disinfectant is to be utilized at this facility. To prevent the disinfectant from siphoning or feeding directly into the pool or pool piping under any type failure of the recirculation equipment, an electrical interlock with the recirculation pump shall be incorporated into the system for electrically operated feeders. A flow sensor controller can also be used to turn offthe feeders when flow is not sensed. The minimum size of the solution reservoirs shall be at least 50 percent of the maximum daily capacity of the feeder. The solution reservoirs shall be marked to indicate contents. (c) Feeders for pH adjustment - Feeders for pH adjustment shall be provided on all pools. pH adjustment feeders shall be positive displacement type, shall be adjustable from zero to full range, and shall have an electrical interlock with the circulation pump to prevent discharge when the recirculation pump is not operating. When soda ash is used for, pH adjustment, the maximum concentration of soda ash solution to be fed shall not exceed one-half pound soda ash per gallon of water. Feeders for soda ash shall be capable of feeding a minimum of three gallons of the above soda ash solution per pound of gas chlorination capacity. The minimum size of the solution reservoirs shall not be less than 50 percent of the maximum daily capacity of the feeder. The solution reservoirs shall be marked to indicate the contents. (d) Ozone generating equipment may be used for supplemental water treatment on public swimming pools subject to the conditions of this section. 1. Ozone generating equipment electrical components and wiring shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and the manufacturer shall provide a certificate of conformance. The process equipment shall be provided with an effective means to alert the user when a component of this equipment is not operating. 2. Ozone generating equipment shall meet the NSF/ANSI Standard 50-2007. 3. The concentration of ozone in the return line to the pool shall not exceed 0.1 mg/L. 4. The injection point for ozone generating equipment shall be located in the pool return line after the filtration and heating equipment, prior to the halogen injection point, and as far as possible from the nearest pool return inlet with a minimum distance of four feet. Injection methods shall include a mixer, contact chamber, or other means of efficiently mixing the ozone with the recirculated water. The injection and mixing equipment shall not prevent the attainment of the required turnover rate of the recirculation system. Ozone generating equipment shall be equipped 18 11 1 1 with a check valve between the generator and the injection point. Ozone generating equipment shall be equipped ' with an air flow meter and a means to control the flow. The generator shall be electrically interlocked with the recirculation pump to prevent the feeding of ozone when the recirculation pump is not operating. A flow sensor controller can also be used to turn off the feeder when flow is not sensed. 5. Ventilation requirements - Ozone generating equipment shall be installed in equipment rooms with either ' forced draft or cross draft ventilation. Below grade equipment rooms with ozone generators shall have forced draft ventilation and all equipment rooms with forced draft ventilation shall have the fan control switch located outside the equipment room door. The exhaust fan intake for forced draft ventilation and at least one vent grille for cross draft ventilation shall be located at floor level. ' 6. A self-contained breathing apparatus designed and rated by it's manufacturer for use in ozone contaminated air shall be provided when ozone generator installations are capable of exceeding the maximum pool water ozone contact concentration of 0.1 milligrams per liter (mg/L). The self-contained breathing apparatus shall be available at all times and shall be used at times when the maintenance or service personnel have determined that the equipment room ozone concentration exceeds 101ng/L. Ozone generator installations which require the self-contained breathing apparatus shall also be provided witb Draeger type detector tube equipment which is capable of detecting ozonc Icvcls of 10 mg/l. and greater. 7. In lieu of the above self contained breathing apparatus an ozone detector capable of detecting I mg/L may be ' used. Said detector must be capable of stopping the production of ozone, venting the room and sounding an alarm once ozone is detected. (e) Ionization units may be used as supplemental water treatment on public pools subject to the condition of this ' paragraph. 1. Ionization equipment and electrical components and wiring shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and the manufacturer shall provide a certification of conformance. 2. Ionization equipment shall meet the NSF/ANSI Standard 50-2007, Circulation System Components and ' Related Materials for Swimming Pools, Spas/Hot Tubs, or equivalent, shall meet UL standards and shall be electrically interlocked with recirculation pump. (f) Ultraviolet (UV) light disinfectant equipment may be used as supplemental water treatment on public pools (and additional treatment on IWFs) subject to the conditions of this paragraph and manufacturer's specifications. ' W is encouraged to be used to eliminate or reduce chlorine resistant pathogens, especially the protozoan Cryptosporidium. 1. UV equipment and electrical components and wiring shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and the manufacturer shall provide a certification of conformance to the ' department. 1 UV equipment shall meet UL standards and shall be electrically interlocked with recirculation pump(s) on all pools and with feature pump(s) on an TWF such that when the UV equipment fails to produce the required dosage as measured by an automated sensor, the feature pump(s) are disabled so the water features ' do not operate. 3. UV equipment shall be validated by a capable party that it delivers the required and predicted UV dose at the validated flow, lamp power and water UV transmittance conditions, and has complied with all professional practices summarized in the USEPA Ultraviolet Disinfectant Guidance Manual dated ' November, 2006, which is publication number EPA 815-R-06-007 available from the department at http://www.floridashealth.org/Environment/water/svAm/index.htmi or at http://www.epa.gov/safewater/disi.nfection/lt2/pdfs/guide lt2_uvguidance.pd.f. 4. UV equipment shall constantly produce a validated dosage of at least 40 mJ/cm2 (mil]iJoules per ' square centimeter) at the end of lamp life. 5. The UV equipment shall not be located in a side stream flow and shall be located to treat all water returning to the pool or water features. ' (17) Water features such as waterfalls or fountains in pools may use up to 20% of the return water from the filter system, however all waters used in the feature shall. not be counted toward attaining the designed turnover rate. Return piping system shall be designed and capable of handling the additional feature flow when the feature is turned off. Features that require more than 20% of the flow rate shall be supplied by an additional pump that drafts from a suitable collector tank. All water features that utilize water from the pool shall be designed to return the water to the pool. Spray features mounted in the pool deck shall be flush with the pool deck and shall be designed with the safety of the pool patron in mind. ' Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514.021, 514.03, 514.031, 19 514.05, 514.06 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Formerly IOD-5.136, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04,5-24-09 . 64E-9.00$ Supervision and Safety (1) All owners, managers, lifeguards or swimming instructors in charge of, or working at, public swimming pools shall be responsible for the supervision and safety of the pool. (a) Lifeguards or swimming instructors, if provided, shall be in firll charge of persons using the pool and shall have authority to enforce all rules. Lifeguards and swimming instructors shall be certified in lifeguarding or swimming instruction, respectively, by the American Red Cross, the YMCA or other equivalent national aquatic training agencies which meet the established standards, objectives and standards of care provided in the American Red Cross or YMCA programs. For the purpose of this rule, the standards found in the 2007 edition of the American Red Cross Lifeguarding Instructors Manual, the 2004 edition of the American Red Cross Water Safety Instructors Manual, the On the Guard 11, The YMCA Lifeguard Manual, (2001) Fourth Edition, (YMCA), The Youth and Adult Aquatic Program Manual (1999), and. (YMCA) The Parent/Child and Preschool Aquatic Program Manual (1999), are hereby adopted by reference, Swimming instructors of developmentally disabled students shall also be certified in accordance with Chapter 51.4.072, FS. (b) Lifeguards and swimming instructors shall also be currently certified in first aid and in adult, child and infant cardiopulmonary resuscitation through the American Red Cross, or the American Heart Association, or the National Safety Council, or the American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons, or by Medic First Aid International., Inc., or by American Safety and Health Institute. (c) Swim coaches are exempted from the swimming instructor certification requirement when training advanced level swimmers for competition. (d) Verification of equivalence, as required above, shall be the responsibility of the Division Director for Environmental Health or his designee. The department shall form an ad hoc advisory group composed of professionals in the field of aquatics. This group shall consist of five members and shall snake recommendations to the department regarding the equivalence of lifeguard or s-Mcoming instructor certification programs submitted to the department under paragraph 64E-9.008(l)(a), F.A,C. Members shall be appointed for a period of 3 years with such appointments being staggered so that the terms of no more than two members expire in any one year. (e) Lifeguard, swimming instructor, cardiopulmonary resuscitation and first aid certificates or photocopies thereof shall be maintained at the pool location and be available for inspection by department personnel at any reasonable hour, (2) Safety Equipment - All swimming pools shall be provided with a shepherd' s hook securely attached to a one piece pole not less than 16 feet in iength, and at least one 18 inch diameter lifesaving ring with sufficient rope attached to reach all parts of the pool from the pool deck. Safety equipment shall be mounted in a conspicuous place and be readily available for use. Pools greater than 50 feet in length shall have multiple units with at least one shepherd' s hook and one lifesaving ring located along each of the longer sides of the pools. Spa pools under 200 square feet of surface area, and interactive water features or wading pools with. two feet or less of water depth. are exempt from this requirement. (3) Safety Lines - AB pools with a slope transition shall have a safety line as required by sub- subparagraph. 64E-9.006(1)(c)2.b., F.A.C. The safety line shall be in place at all times unless a lifeguard or instructor is present. (4) Pool covers and solar blankets shall only be used during times when the pool is closed. Unless the pool cover or solar blanket is secured around the entire perimeter and is designed to support a live load of an adult person, the pool area shall be inaccessible to unauthorized individuals during times of cover or blanket use. (5) Chemical storage - Chemicals shall be stored in a cool, dry, and well ventilated area under a roof and the area shall be inaccessible to the public. Chemicals which emit corrosive fumes shall not be stored in the equipment roam. Empty chemical containers shall be stored and disposed of in such a manner that they are not accessible to the public. (6) Swimming pool slides shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and sound engineering practice. Pools with slides designed for swimming pools are not required to satisfy those of slide plunge pools in subsection 64E-9,011(2), F.A.C., however, the need for increased turnover shall be taken into consideration by the design engineer in determining what constitutes sound engineering. (7) Rules and regulations -- Rules and regulations for bathers shall be posted in minimum I inch letters which. must be legible from the pool deck, and shall contain the following: 1. No food or beverages in pool or on pool wet deck. 20 E u 1 1 u 1 1 1 2. No glass or animals in the fenced pool area (or 50 feet from unfenced pool). ' 3. Bathing load: persons. 4. Pool hours: - a.m. to _ p-m. 5. Shower before entering. Pools of 200 square feet in area or greater without an approved diving well configuration shall have "NO ' DIVING', in four inch letters included with the above listed pool rules. 6. For new or modified pools submitted for plan approval application on or after the effective date of this rule, their posted sign shall add: Do not swallow the pool water. (8) Night swimming - Pools shall not be open for swimming at night unless the requirements for lighting ' as specified in paragraph 64E-9.006(2)(c), F.A.C., are met. Night swimming shall be considered one half hour before sunset to one half hour after sunrise. (9) Pools with heaters shall have a maximum water temperature of 104° F. (10) Floating and climb-on devices, objects or toys that are not a part of the approved pool design shall ' not be tethered in the pool or installed without engineering modification application and department approval. Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 381.0015, 381.006, 514.021, 514.03, ' 514.031, 514.05, 514.06, 514.071 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Formerly IOD-5.137, Amended 12-27-98, 5- 27-04, 5-24-09. L' 1 64E-9.009 Wading Pools (1) Wading pools shall meet the requirements of Rules 64E-9.001 through 64E-9.008, F.A.C., unless otherwise indicated. Wading pools and associated piping shall not be physically connected to any other swimming pools and have no minimum width dimensions requirements. (2) Depths - Wading pools shall have a maximum depth of 2 feet. The depth at the perimeter of the pool shall be uniform and shall not exceed 12 inches. However, where department-approved zero depth entry designs are used, this uniform depth requirement must be met only on the remainder of the pool outside the zero depth entry portion. The pool floor shall not be more than 12 inches below the deck unless steps and handrails are provided. Depth and NO DIVING markers are not required on wading pools. (3) Recirculation - Wading pools shall have a minimum of one turnover every one hour. Lines from main drains shall discharge into a collector tank. (a) Skimmer equalizer lines when required shall be plumbed into the main drain. (b) The grate cover shall be sized so as not to allow the flow to exceed 1.5 feet per second (fps) when the equalizer line is operating. (4) Inlets -Wading pools with 20 feet or less of perimeter shall have a minimum of two equally spaced adjustable inlets. (5) Emergency drainage - All wading pools shall have drainage to waste without a cross-connection through a quick opening valve to facilitate emptying the wading pool should accidental bowel or other discharge occur. (6) Vacuuming - Wading pools shall have no provisions for direct suction vacuuming where the vacuum port is in the pool floor or pool wall or accessible to patrons. Wading pools of less than 200 square feet are not required to have a vacuuming method provided. Wading pools 200 square feet or larger shall provide for vacuuming through the skimmer., a portable vacuum system or an alternative approved method that does not involve a direct suction port in the pool. The department recommends that all existing direct suction vacuum apparatus be removed for bather safety. (7) Wading pool decks - When adjacent to swimming pools within 50 feet, wading pools shall be enclosed and separated from the swimming pool by a barrier or fence of a minimum of 48 inches in height with self latching and self-closing gates. When adjacent to areas less than one foot deep of zero depth entry pools, the fence or effective barrier is required if the water edges are less than 40 feet apart. Wading pools shall have a minimum 10 foot wide deck around at least 50 percent of their perimeter with the remainder of the perimeter deck being at least four feet wide. There shall be at least 10 feet between adjacent swimming pools and wading pools. (8) Wading pools are exempt from underwater lighting requirements but do require deck and surface lighting of 10 foot-candles if indoors or 6 foot-candles for outdoor night use. Such illumination shall be provided over the pool water surface and the pool deck surface. (9) Automated Oxidation Reduction Potential (ORP) and pH controllers with sensing probes shall be provided to assist in maintaining proper disinfection and pH levels. (10) Should a fecal accident occur, the requirements of 64E-9.004(14) shall be met or the pool may be drained and 21 11 both the pool and the filter system and all plumbing shall be properly disinfected, Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.02] FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514.021 FS. History-New 10- 5-93, Formerly I OD-5.138, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5-24-09. 64E-9.010 Spa Pools (1) Spa pools shall meet the requirements of Rules 64E-9,001 through 64E-9.008, F.A.C., unless specifically indicated otherwise. (2) The color, pattern or finish of the pool interior shall not obscure the existence or presence of objects or surfaces within the pool. (3) Water depths - Spa type pools shall have a minimum water depth of 2 1/2 feet and a maximum water depth of 4 feet, except that swim spa pools may have a maximum water depth of 5 feet. Depth markers and NO DIVING markers are not required on spa type pools with 200 or less square feet of water surface area. (4) Steps and handrails - Steps or ladders shall be provided and shall be located to provide adequate entrance to and exit from the pool. The number of sets of steps or ladders required shall be on the basis of one for each 75 feet, or major fraction thereof, of pool perimeter. Step sets for spa type pools with more than 200 square feet of pool water surface area shall comply with subparagraph 64E-9.006(1)(d)3., F.A.C. Step sets for spa type pools with 200 square feet or less of pool water surface area shall comply with the following: Step treads shall have a minimum width of 10 inches for a minimum continuous tread length of 12 inches. Step riser heights shall not exceed 12 inches, -Intermediate treads and risers between the top and bottom treads and risers shall be uniform in width and height, respectively. Contrasting markings. on the leading edges of the submerged benches and the intersections of the treads and risers are required, to be installed in accordance with subparagraph 64E-9.006(l)(d)3., F.A.C. (a) Handrails shall be provided for all sets of steps and shall be anchored in the bottom step and in the deck. Handrails shall be located to provide maximum access to the steps and handrails shall extend 28 inches above the pool deck. (b) Where "figure four" handrails are used, they shall be anchored. in the deck and shall oxtend laterally to any point vertically above the bottom step. Handrails shall be located to provide maximum access to the steps and handrails shall extend 28 inches above the pool deck. (5) Decks - Decks shall have a minimum four foot wide unobstructed width around the entire pool perimeter except that pools of less than 120 square feet of pool water surface area shall have a minimum four foot wide unobstructed continuous deck around a minimum of 50 percent of the pool perimeter. Decks less than four feet wide shall have 'barriers to prevent their use. Decks shall not be more than 10 inches below the top of the pool. For pools of 120 square feet or greater, ten percent of the deck along the pool. perimeter may be obstructed. (6) Therapy or jet systems (a) The return lines of spa type therapy or jet systems shall be independent of the recirculation-filtration and heating systems. (b) Therapy or jet pumps shall take suction from the collector tank. Collector tank sizing shall take this additional gallonage into consideration. (c) Cold plunge spas do not require a therapy or jet system, but do require the installation of a chiller. (d) Heated systems shall incorporate a 15 minute patron activated timer on the therapy pump circuit. (7) Filtration system inlets - Spa type pools with less than 20 feet of perimeter shall have a minimum of two equally spaced adjustable inlets. (8) Filtration recirculation - Spa type pools shall have a minimum of one turnover every 30 minutes. The piping, fittings, and, hydraulic requirements shall be in accordance with Rule 64E-9,007, RA.C. All recirculation lines to and from the pool shall be individually valved with proportional flow type valves in order to control the recirculation flow. (9) Vacuuming - Spa type pools of over 200 square feet of pool water surface area shall have provisions for vacuuming. (1.0) Oils, body lotions, and minerals - Oils, body lotions, and minerals or materials not associated with chemicals used for water chemistry balance, algae control, and disinfection of the water are prohibited in the spa pool. (11.) Bench seat edges shall be marked in accordance with subparagraph 64E-9.006(l)(c)2., F.A.C. When spa pools are part of a conventional swimming pool, the spa pool area shall be offset from the main pool area with the same water depth as the main pool area. The spa pool shall meet all the spa pool requirements of this chapter, and the deck area at the spa shall be protected by connected 30 inch high stanchions or other impediment acceptable to the department. The deck perimeter at the offset spa area shall not exceed 15 percent of the entire swimming pool perimeter. 22 11 fl 11 1 (12) Portable and wooden type spa pools are prohibited. (13) Automated Controllers Automated Oxidation Reduction Potential (ORP) and pH controllers with sensing probes shall be provided on spa pools to assist in maintaining proper disinfection and pH levels. (14) In addition to the requirements of subsection 64E-9.008(7), F.A.C., spa pool signs shall include the following: (a) Maximum water temperature 104° F. (b) Children under twelve must have adult supervision. (c) Pregnant women, small children, people with health problems and people using alcohol, narcotics or other drugs that cause drowsiness should not use spa pools without first consulting a doctor. (d) Maximum use 15 minutes. (15) A clock shall be visible from the spa pool to assist the patron in meeting the requirement of paragraph 64E- 9.010(14)(d), F.A..C., above. (16) If a spa is equipped with an emergency cut-off or kill switch, provisions for a minimum 80 decibel audible alarm near the spa to sound, continuously until deactivated when such device is triggered shall be incorporated. This is to alert pool patrons and operators of a potential public health situation or to indicate that the spa filtration and treatment system may be off. The following additional rule sign shall be visible by the spa which reads "ALARM INDICATES SPA PUMPS OFF. DO NOT USE SPA WHEN ALARM SOUNDS UNTIL ADVISED OTHERWISE." Where emergency cut-off switches are provided on existing or new spa pools, the alarm and signage specified in 64E-9.010(16), F.A.C., above shall be provided within 180 days of effective date of this rule. (17) Should a fecal accident occur, the requirements of 64E-9.004(14) shall be met or the pool may be drained and both the pool and the filter system and all plumbing shall be properly disinfected. Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 386.01, 386.02, 386.03, 386.041, 386.051, 514.011, 514.021, 514.03, 514.031, 514.05, 514.06 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Formerly 1 OD-5.139, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5-24-09. 64E-9.011 Water Recreation Attractions and Specialized Pools (1) General - Water recreation attraction projects shall be designed and constructed within the limits of sound engineering practice. Design engineers may consult with the department in reference to concepts of design variations and to areas where potential problems may exist In addition to the requirements of this section, compliance is required with Rules 64E-9.001 through 64E-9.008 and 64E-9.017, F.A.C., of this chapter depending upon the pool design and function. Additionally, all pools listed in this section shall have a two hour turnover rate unless otherwise noted. A lifeguard and/or safety plan shall be submitted with the application for construction of the pools listed below in sections 64E-9.011(2), (3) when climbable structures are planned. (2) Water slide plunge pools. (a) Water slide plunge pool - Plunge pools shall be constructed of concrete or other structurally rigid impervious materials with a non-toxic, smooth and slip resistant finish. The plunge pool design shall be as follows: 1. Plunge pool water depth - The minimum plunge pool operating water depth at the slide flume terminus shall. be three feet, This depth shall be maintained for a minimum distance of 10 feet in front of the slide terminus from which point the plunge pool floor may have a constant upward slope to allow a minimum water depth of two feet at the base of the steps. The floor slope shall not exceed one foot in 10 feet. The plunge pool water depth shall be cotmuensurate with safety and the ease of exit from the plunge pool. 2. Plunge pool dimension- The plunge pool dimension between any slide flume exit or terminus and the opposite side of the plunge pool shall be a minimum of 20 feet excluding steps. 3. Slide flume terminus. a. The slide flume terminus shall be designed by the design engineer who can demonstrate to the department's satisfaction that riders will be adequately slowed prior to discharge so as to prevent injury or harm to the rider upon impact with the plunge pool water. The slide terminus shall be flush with the pool wall and located at or below the pool water level. b. The minimum distance between any plunge pool side wall and the outer edge of any slide terminus shall be five feet. The minimum distance between adjacent slide flumes shall be six feet c. A minimum length of slide flume of 10 feet shall be perpendicular to the plunge pool wall at the exit 23 end of the flumes. 4. Plunge pool main drains - The plunge pool shall have a minimum of one main drain with separate piping and valve to the filtration system collector tank. The velocity through the openings of the main drain grate shall not exceed one and one-half feet per second at the design flow rate of the recirculation pump. The main drain piping shall be sized to handle 100 percent of the design flow rate of the filtration system with a maximum flow velocity of three feet per second. 5. Plunge pool floor slope - The plunge pool floor shall slope to the main drains and the slope shall not exceed one foot in 10 feet. 6. Plunge pool decks. a. Width - The minimum width of plunge pool decks along the exit side shall be 10 feet. b. Slopes - All plunge pool decks shall slope to the plunge pool or pump reservoir or to deck drains which discharge to waste, or other acceptable means. All slopes shall be between two and four percent grade. (b) Run out lanes - I . Run out lanes may be utilized in lieu of a plunge pool system provided they are constructed to the slide manufacturers specifications and are approved by the design engineer of record.- 2. Five foot wide walkways shall be provided adjacent to run out lanes. 3. Minimum water level indicator markings shall be provided on both sides of the run out trough to insure adequate water for the safe slowing of pool patrons, 4. Water park personnel shall be provided at the top of the slides and at the run out. (c) Pump reservoirs - Pump reservoirs shall be made of concrete or other impervious material with a smooth slip resistant finish. Pump reservoirs shall be for the slide pump intakes, but where properly sized may also be used as a collector tank for the filter system. Pump reservoir designs shall be as follows: 1. Pump reservoir volume - The minimum reservoir volume shall be equal to three minutes of the combined flow rate in gpm of all filter and slide pumps. 2. Pump reservoir security - Pump reservoirs shall be accessible only to authorized individuals. 3. Pump reservoir maintenance accessibility -- Access decks shall be provided for the reservoir such that all areas are accessible for vacuuming, skimming, and maintenance. The decks shall have a. minimum width of three feet and shall have a minimum slope of three inches in 10 feet away from the reservoir. 4. Pump reservoir slide pump intakes - The slide pump intakes shall be located in the pump reservoir and shall be designed to allow cleaning without danger of operator entrapment. 5_ Pump reservoir main drains - The pump reservoir shall have a minimum of one main drain. with separate piping and valve to the filtration system collector tank and the velocity through the openings of the main drain grates shall not exceed one and one-half feet per second at the design flow rate of the filtration system pump. The main drain piping shall be sized to handle 100 percent of design flow rate of the filtration system pump with a maximum flow velocity of three feet per second. 6. The pump reservoir shall be fed by main drains within the plunge pool itself (either in the floor or side wall,). They shall have the maximum flow velocity of 1.5 feet per second through the main drain grating and 3 feet per second through piping to the reservoir. (d) Slide pump check valves -- Slide pumps shall have check valves on all discharge lines. (e) Perimeter overflow gutters or skimmers - Plunge pools and pump reservoirs shall have perimeter overflow gutter system or skimmer which shall be an integral part of the filtration system. 1. Perimeter overflow gutter systems -- Perimeter overflow gutter systems shall meet the requirements of paragraph 64E-9.007(3)(a), F.A,C., except that gutters are not required directly under slide flumes or along the weirs which separate plunge pools and pump reservoirs. 2. Surface skimmers - Surface skimmers may be used in, lieu of perimeter overflow gutters and shall be appropriately spaced and located according to the structural design. Unless an overflow gutter system is used, surface skimmers shall be provided in the plunge pool and in the pump reservoir and the skimmer system shall be designed to carry 60 percent of the filtration system design flow rate with each skimmer carrying a minimum 30 gallons per minute. All surface skimmers shall meet the requirements for NSF commercial approval as set forth in NSF/ANSI Standard 50-2007, Circulation System Components and Related Materials for Swimming Pools, Spas/Hot Tubs, which is incorporated by reference in these rules, including an equalizer valve in the skimmer and an equalizer line to the pool wall on systems with direct connection to pump suction. (f) Water slide recirculation.- filtration equipment. 1. Recirculation rate - The recirculation-filtration system of water slides shall recirculate and filter a 24 I f] 1 1 [1 water volume equal to the total water volume of the facility in a period of two hours or less. 2_ Filter areas -- Minimum filter area requirements shall be twice the filter areas specified for the recirculation rates stipulated in paragraph 64E-9.007(5)(a), F.A.C. The filtration system shall be capable of returning the pool water turbidity to five-tenths NTU within eight hours or less after peak bather load. 3. Hair and lint strainer - Any filtration system pump which takes suction directly from the plunge pool and reservoir shall have a minimum eight inch diameter hair and lint strainer on the suction side of the pump. (g) Disinfection - The disinfection equipment shall be capable of feeding 12 ing/L of halogen to the continuous recirculation flow of the filtration system. (h) Slide design and construction is the responsibility of a professional engineer licensed in Florida and the applicant. (j) A lockable gate shall be provided at the stair or ladder entrance to the slide. (j) Upon. construction completion, a professional engineer licensed in Florida shall certify that the slide was constructed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and is structurally sound. (3) Water activity pools. (a) Water activity pools shall be designed and, constructed within the limits of sound cri inecring practice. The design engineer may consult with the department prior to preparation and submission of engineering plans and specifications for water activity pools. (b) Water activity pools shall be constructed of concrete or other structurally rigid impervious materials with a non-toxic, smooth and slip resistant finish. These pools shall be of such shape, length, width, and design as to be operated and maintained in a safe and sanitary manner. (c) The recirculation-filtration system of water activity pools shall achieve a minimum of one turnover every two hours for water activity pools over two feet deep, and in one hour for these pools that are two feet deep or less. (d) Those portions of the activity pool where the water depth will not allow for the proper installation of underwater lighting, shall be provided with six foot candles of lighting on the deck and the water surface. (e) Fence requirements shall be in accordance with 64E-9.009(7), F.A.C. (f) Play features with an overhead clearance of less than four feet shall be blocked or barricaded to preclude children becoming entrapped. (g) In addition to the requirements of subsection 64E-9.008(7), F.A.C., all water activity pool signs shall have the following added in one inch letters within one year of the effective date of this rule. Do not swallow the pool water, it is recirculated. Do not use pool if you are ill with diarrhea. (4) Wave pools. (a) Wave pools shall be designed and constructed. within the limits of sound engineering practice. The design engineer may consult with the department prior to preparation and submission of engineering plans and specifications for wave pools. (b) Wave pools shall be constructed of concrete or other impervious materials with a smooth slip resistant finish. These pools shall be of such shape and design as to be operated and maintained in a safe and sanitary manner. (c) The recirculation-filtration system of wave pools shall be capable of a minimum of one turnover every three hours. (d) Floors shall be sloped in accordance with the manufacturer's or design engineer's specifications, however, they shall not exceed. the slope limits of 64E-9.006(1)(c)2.a., F.A.C. (5) River Rides. (a) River Rides shall be constructed within the limits of sound engineering practice. The design engineer may consult with the department prior to preparation and submission of engineering plans and specifications for River, Rides. (b) River Rides shall be constructed on concrete or other impervious materials with a non-toxic, smooth and slip resistant finish. These rides shall be of such shape and design as to be operated in a safe and sanitary manner. (c) The recirculation-filtration system of the River Ride shall be capable of a minimum of one volume turnover every three hours. (d) The maximum water depth of the River Ride shall not exceed three feet unless justified to the department's satisfaction by the design engineer. (e) Decking shall be provided at the entrance and exit points as necessary to provide safe patron access but shall not be smaller than 10 feet in width and length. Additional decking along the ride course is not required except that decking shall be required at lifeguard locations and emergency exit points. 25 1 (f) Access and exit shall be provided at the start and end of the ride, and additional exit locations shall be located along the ride course as necessary to provide for the safety of the patrons. (g) Propulsion jets shall be installed in the walls of the river ride. In the alternative, propulsion jets may be installed in the floor if they are covered by a grate that will inhibit entrapment or injury of the pool patrons' feet or limbs. (6) Zero Depth Entry Pools. (a) Zero depth entry pools shall have a continuous floor slope from the water edge to the deep end. (b) The deck level perimeter overflow system with grate shall be provided at the waters edge across the entire zero depth portion of the pool. (c) The pool deck may slope a maximum of I in 12 toward the pool for no more than S seven feet, as measured from the overflow system grate outward, Beyond this area the deck shall slope away from the pool in accordance with. subparagraph 64E-9.006(2)(x)1., F.A.C. (d) No-Entry, Shallow Water signs shall be provided along the pool wall edge where the water depth is less than 3 feet deep. No-entry signs shall be slip-resistant tile, shall have 4 inch high letters, shall be located within 2 feet of the pool edge, shall be spaced no more than 15 feet apart and shall be recessed flush with the surrounding area. (e) Additional inlets shall be provided in areas of less than 18 inches deep. The numbers and location shall be such as to double the flow rate into this area- (f) The recirculation-filtration system shall be of a minimum of one turnover every two hours in the area of the pool that is three feet deep or less. In the remainder of the pool where the depth is greater than three feet, the system shall have a maximum six hour turnover rate. The design plans submitted by the applicant shall provide the volume of water in the pool area of three feet depth and less, the volume of water in the pool area greater than three feet in depth, and the total volume in the pool for determination of minimurn circulation flow. The volume calculations shall provide verification that the correct volume of water is used to determine the minimum flow at the two hour and the six hour flow requirements. (g) Those portions of the zero depth entry pool, where the water depth will not allow for the proper installation of underwater lighting, shall be provided with 6 foot candles of lighting on the deck and the water. (h) Play structures in a zero depth entry area (in depth 0-3 feet) may be within 15 feet of the pool walls, but shall comply with sound engineering requirements for the safety of pool patrons. (7) Special Purpose Pools. (a) General - Special purpose pool projects may deviate from the requirements of other sections of these rules provided the design and construction are within the limits of sound engineering practice. Only those deviations necessary to accommodate the special usage shall be allowed and all other aspects of tite pool shall comply with the requirements of this section and with Rules 64E-9.001 through 64E-9.008, F.A.C. The design engineer may consult with the department prior to preparation and submission of engineering plans for special purpose pools. (b) A special purpose pool may incorporate ledges which do not overhang into the pool. (c) The operating permit shall state the purpose for which the pool is to be used. (8) Interactive Water Features. (IWFs) (a) Waters discharged from all fountain or spray features shall not pond on the feature floor but shall flow by gravity through a main drain fitting to a collection system which discharges to a collector tank. The minimum size of the collector tank shall be equal to the volume of 3 minutes of the combined flow of all feature pumps and the filter pump. Adequate access shall be provided to the collector tank. Stairs or a ladder shall be provided as needed to ensure safe entry into the tank. (b) An automatic skimmer system shall be provided in. the collector tank. A variable height skimmer may be used or a custom surface skirnmer device may be substituted if deemed appropriate by both the design engineer and the department. (c) Chemical feeders shall be in accordance with Rule 6413-9.007, F.A.C., except that the disinfection feeder shall be capable of feeding 12 mg/L of free chlorine to the filter return piping (based upon a hypothetical 30 minute turnover of the contained volume within the system). Automated Oxidation Reduction Potential (ORP) and pH controllers with sensing probes shall be provided to assist in maintaining proper disinfection and pH levels. (d) If night operation is proposed, 6 foot candles of light shall be provided on the pool deck and the water feature area. Lighting that may be exposed to the feature pool water shall not exceed IS volts, shall be installed. in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and be approved for such use by UL or NSF_ (e) All electrical work shall comply with the National Electrical Code Edition that is incorporated by reference. 26 u n 1 t 1 1 (f) Hydraulics. 1. The filter system shall filter and chemically treat all water that is returned to the spray features. The filter system shall draft from the collector tank and return filtered and treated water directly to the spray features. Excess water not required by the spray features shall be returned to the collector tank. 2. Alternatively, the contained volume of the system may be filtered and chemically treated based upon a 30 minute turnover of the contained volume with 100% returned to the collector tank by manifold piping. If this alternative is chosen, all water returned to the spray feature(s) must also be treated with an Ultraviolet (UV) light disinfection equipment to accomplish protozoan destruction in accordance with sound engineering and the requirements at 64E-9.007(16)0. This alternative must have the ability to feed 6 mg/L free chlorine to the feature water as it is returned to the spray feature. The UV disinfection equipment shall be electrically interconnected such that whenever it fails to produce the required UV dosage, the water spray features pump(s) and flow will be immediately stopped. 3. An automatic water level controller shall be provided. 4. The flow rate through the feature nozzles of the water features shall be such as not to harm the patrons and shall not exceed 20 feet per second unless justified by the design engineer and by the fountain system manufacturer. 5. An overfill waste line with air gap shall be provided. 6. A means of vacuuming and completely draining the tank(s) shall be provided. 7. Where the filter system described in 64E-9.01 I (8)(f)l. is utilized, a second falter system and disinfection system shall be provided to treat the water in the collector tank when the feature/filter pump is not in operation. Said system shall be capable of filtering the total volume of water in the collector tank in 30 minutes and the disinfection system shall be capable of providing 12 mg/L of disinfectant to this flow rate. (g) TWFs shall be fenced in the same fashion as wading pools as noted in section 64E-9.009(7), F.A.C. Where the 1WF is at least 50 feet from all other pools and is not designed to have any standing water, fencing requirements should be carefully considered by the applicant to control usage, but are not required by rule. (h) A minimum four foot wide wet deck area shall be provided around all IWFs. The wet deck shall meet the requirements of subparagraph 64E-9.006(2)(a)1., however, up to 50% of the perimeter may be obstructed. (i) IWFs shall be constructed of concrete or other impervious and structurally rigid inatetial. 0) In addition to the requirements of subsection 64E-9.008(7), F.A.C., all IWF pool rule signs shall have the following added in one inch letters within one year of the effective date of this rule, Do not swallow the fountain water, it is recirculated. Do not use fountain if you are ill with diarrhea. (k) Floor slopes of an IWF shall be a maximum one foot vertical in ten feet horizontal and a minimum of one foot vertical in fifty feet horizontal. (9) Water Theme Parks: Shall meet all other aspects of these rules for the features provided. (a) Rules and regulations for water theme parks shall be posted in minimum I -inch letters at each entrance to the park and shall contain the following: 1. No food, drink, glass, or animals in the pool or on the pool decks- 2. Park operating hours ._.. A.M. to P.M. 3. Shower before entering 4. Do not swallow the pool water (b) Showers shall be provided at or near the entrance (queue line) to a water recreation attraction. (c) Water theme parks are exempt from the fencing requirements of subsection 64E-9.006(2)(h), F.A.C.; except that pools designed for small children. shall. be fenced when located within 50 feet of a pool with water depths of 3 feet or more, (d) Sanitary Facilities within a water theme park shall be as near to the water recreation attractions as prudent to ensure patron use, but not over 200 feet walking distance from any exit of a water attraction. Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514.021, 514.03, 514.031, 514.05, 514.06 FS, History-New 10-5-93, Formerly I OD-5.140, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5-24-09. 64E-9.013 Bathing Places (1) General - Approval for the development of a public bathing place and a permit to operate a public bathing place shall be obtained from the department. (2) Development - The following shall be submitted to the department for consideration towards the development of a public bathing place: 27 (a) Six sets of site plans, prepared by a professional engineer or professional surveyor or mapper which detail the location, contours of the shoreline and bottom, appurtenances such as sanitary facilities, nearby boat docks/mooring facilities, diving or slide facilities, and pertinent details from the sanitary survey, Said professional engineer(s) and surveyors and mappers shall. be licensed in the state of Florida under the provision of Chapter 471 or 472, F.S., and shall fulfill the requirements of Section 471.025 or 472,025, F,S. (b) A sanitary survey identifying potential sources of contamination as exemplified by streams, unsewered residential areas, water and wastewater treatment plants, sewage outfalls, storm drain outfalls, industrial drainage and waste outfalls, agricultural drainage, sanitary landfills, open dumps, animal enclosures, wildlife populations, and potential high erosion areas. The survey shall include consideration of present or possible future pollution of the bathing water from the above potential sources of contamination and from other forms of pollution including bottom deposits, turbidity of water, decaying vegetation, surface runoff, and the anticipated bather load. The survey shall establish that the bathing water has a flow through of a minimum of 500 gallons per anticipated bather per 24 hours, unless the water surface area of the body of water is two acres or more. The bathing load in lakes shall be based on 100 sq. ft. per bather, and only those portions of the lake within the bathing area shall be considered as the basis of the bathing load, Water, current; shall not exceed three feet per second. A written report of the sanitary survey shall be submitted to the department and shall include a presentation and evaluation of the findings and a recommendation relative to the development and permitting of the bathing place. (c) A bacteriological survey shall be submitted to the department and the fecal eoliform, E. eoli, or enterococci densities indicated by this survey shall not exceed the standards of subsection 64E-9.013(4), F.A,C. The survey shall consist of a minimum of three bacteriological samples collected from the proposed bathing area daily for the first three days of each week for three consecutive weeks. Either MPN or MF counts may be utilized. Should the MF method results differ significantly from the MPN method results, the MPN results shall prevail. The bacteriological survey results shall be reviewed in light of the sanitary survey. (d) Fees as per Rule 64E-9.015, F.A.C. (e) A legal survey of the property by a registered land surveyor shall be provided. (f) A water clarity measurement by Secchi disk reading in feet using an 8 inch diameter black and. white Secel?i disk, Where water clarity does not achieve four feet depth for a period of at least 5 days during the period of operation due to natural water color, the department will consider approval of the bathing area with submittal of a satisfactory lifeguard plan, patron notification plan and materials, swim zone depth demarcation for children and beginners, and other special. conditions that would apply to the individual site. (g) A lifeguard and/or safety plan shall be submitted with the appiication for development of all new bathing areas. (3) Operation. (a) The following must be submitted prior to operation: 1. Six operating permit applications, DH 917. 2. Fees as per Rule 64E-9.015, F.A_C. (b) Operational water quality - The water shall be free of chemical and physical substances known or suspected of being capable of creating toxic reactions or skin or membrane irritations. Algae and aquatic vegetation shall be controlled so that no hazard to bathers results. (c) Bacteriological samples shall be collected monthly. A set of two samples shall be collected for every 200 feet of shoreline, the samples shall be taken a foot below the surface in three feet of water and at least 25 feet apart. The samples shall be analyzed by a DOH certified laboratory using EPA approved methods for ambient water and the results submitted to the department within 10 days after the end of the month. Should the test results of these samples exceed the standards in 64E-9.013(4) below, the county health department shall be notified within 24 hours of receipt from the lab, and re-sampling by the permit holder shall be required within 24 hours. All sampling results shall be submitted to the county health department. If 24 hour resampling is not possible for any reason, then the bathing place shall be closed immediately to swimming based upon these initial results during the time period waiting for re-sampling results. If the 24 hour confirmation samples reveal an exceedance of the standards, the bathing place shall be closed immediately to swimming until. additional testing reveals the water meets single sample standards again. If a pollution source is identified, that source shall be eliminated before reopening the bathing area. (d) Inspections - county health departments shall perform two inspections per year which shall include: 1. A site inspection in light of the original sanitary survey, changed natural conditions, changed use conditions, and originally permitted facilities. 28 1 n 1 1 1 1 1 I? fl 1 2. A bacteriological test consisting of the normal monthly sampling requirement. The fecal coliform, E. soli or enterococci density must not exceed the single sample standards of subsection 64E-9.013(4), F.A.C. 3. A water clarity test shall be performed wherein an 8" black and white secchi disk shall be visible to a minimum depth of four feet. 4. The bathing place shall be temporarily closed or swimming prohibited, as appropriate, by the owner or the department if inspection reveals water clarity violations, unsafe bacterial test results, or immediate hazards to health or safety such as, but not limited to sewage in water, broken glass, dangerous wildlife, hazardous structural or electrical conditions, toxic algal blooms, or other serious disease agents present. 5. The bathing load shall be calculated on one bather per 25 square feet of surface area in areas of less than four feet of depth and one bather per 75 square feet of surface area where the water depth exceeds four feet, (e) Trash and garbage receptacles shall be provided and said trash disposed of at least weekly. (f) Muck or silt shall not be present from. the shoreline to a depth of five feet and aquatic vegetation shall be controlled. (g) Site specific signage shall be provided. The bathing load shall be posted and due consideration shall be given to safety guidelines such as steep slope, diving areas, deep water, underwater obstruction, dangerous wildlife, or lifeguard not on duty. Additional signage shall be provided if the bathing area is longer than 300 feet. (h) Restrooms, platforms, diving boards, docks, beaches and walkways shall be kept clean and in good repair. Diving areas shall be readily identified, and shall have adequate water depth for safe diving based on the depth requirements of the FINA standards previously adopted herein. Shallow areas shall not be utilized for diving and shall be so marked. (i) Glass items and domestic animals are prohibited in the bathing area and on the adjacent beach area. 0) Sanitary facilities shall be provided and shall be as near to the bathing area as prudent to ensure patron use. 1. Women's restrooms shall have a fixture set including a water closet and a lavatory. 2. Men's restrooms shall have a fixture set including a urinal, a water closet and a lavatory. 3. Additional restroom fixture shall be provided based on stated usage. A second water closet, urinal and lavatory shall be provided in the men's restroom if the stated usage exceeds 50 patrons, but is less than ISO patrons. Another urinal, water closet and lavatory shall be provided for each additional 100 patrons. The number of water closets in the women's restroom shall be based on a three to two ratio with three water closets being provided. in the women's restroom for every two fixtures in the men's restroom. For this purpose of establishing the men's restroom fixture count, both water closets and urinals shall be included. The number of lavatories in the women's restroom shall match the number in the men's restroom. 4. Restroom floors shall be impervious, slip resistant and slope to floor drains, (4) Bacteriological Standards - Either fecal coliform, E. coli, or enterococci bacteria shall be tested for, at the option of the permit holder. All samples tested will be considered to determine compliance, unless found to be invalid by the certified lab or county health department. The enterococci density shall not exceed an average of 33 colony forming units (CFU) per 100 mL of water, nor exceed 61 per 100 mL of water in any single sample; or the E. cols density shall not exceed an average of 126 CFU per 100 mL of water, not exceed 235 CFU 908 per 100 mL of water in. any single sample; or the fecal coliform shall not exceed an average of 200 CFU per 100 mL of water, nor 400 per 100 mL of water in 10 percent of the samples, nor 800 CFU per 100 mL of water in a single sample. This average shall be expressed as geometric means using at least 5 samples per 30 day period. Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514,021, 514.03, 514.031, 514.04, 514.05, 514.06 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Fonnerly I OD-5.142, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5- 24-09. 64E-9.015 Fee Schedule (1) Plan review. (a) Original construction - 1. Pools of 25,000 gallons or less - $350.00 2. Pools greater than 25,000 gallons - $500.00 (b) Modifications of Approved Construction Plans - $150.00 (c) Modification of existing pools - $150.00 (d) Original development of bathing places - $275.00 (c) Modification of existing bathing places - $100.00 (2) Authorization and Operating Permit Issuance for Swimming Pools and Bathing Places (a) Initial Operating Permit - $150.00 29 1 (b) Operating Permits as indicated below: (c) Original Operating Permit - Full annual renewal fee if the authorization was issued from. July 1 st to December 31 st; one half the annual fee if the authorization was issued from January 1 st to June 30th. , (d) Annual renewal of operating permits, use form DH4063: 1. Pools greater than 25,000 gallons and bathing places - $250.00 2. Pools of 25,000 gallons or less -- $125.00 3. Exempted condominiums/ cooperatives with over 32 units - $50.00 ' 4. Non-routine inspection (no charge for first reinspection) _ $40.00 (3) All fees collected pursuant to this subsection shall be deposited in the Public Swimming Pool and Bathing Place Trust Fund under a unique revenue code within the individual county public health fund to be used to meet the cost of carrying out that portion of the Public Swimming Pool and Bathing Place Program described in this chapter. ' Ten percent of each tee collected by the county public health unit pursuant to Rule 64F-9.015, F.A.C., shall be transferred to a special account set up by the department's State Flealth Office to offset the headquarters' cost of providing technical, monitoring, training, standardization, quality assurance and administrative assistance for this , program. (1) Fee payment is not required for a replacement copy of an operating permit or reissuance of an operating permit due to change of ownership or name. (5) Variances- Review of application for variance- $300.00 ' Rulemaking-Authority 381.006, 514.021, 514.033 FS. Law implemented 514.021, 514.03, 514.031, 514.033 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Formerly IOD-5.144, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5-24-09. 64E-9.016 Variances A variance from requirements of these rules may be requested by the pool owner or their representative to relieve or prevent hardship only in cases involving deviations from the rule, when it is shown that the hardship was not caused intentionally by the action of the applicant, where no reasonable alternative exists ' and the health and safety of the pool patrons is not at risk. Application for variance shall be submitted through the county health department utilizing DOH Form 4080. Each application can be accompanied by supportive materials such as drawings, pictures or manufacturers specifications. Applications must be received at least 30 days prior to the scheduled meeting of the Governor's Swimming Pool Advisory Board, which normally meets on the second Wednesday of each odd-numbered month. Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.01 15, 5i4.021 FS. Law Implemented 514.0115, 514.021, 514.028, 514.051, 5I4.06 FS. History New 10-5-93, Formerly IOD-5.145, Amended 12-27-98, 5-24-09. , 64E-9.017 Enforcement Any public pool can be immediately posted closed by the department as not being in compliance with Chapter 64E-9, F.A.C., whenever any of the following conditions occur: (1)(a) The disinfectant level is below the minimum or above the maximum that is prescribed in subparagraph 64E-9.004(1)(d)2., F.A.C. (b) The pH of the pool water is below 7.2 or above 7.8. , (c) The clarity of the pool water is such that the main drain grate is not readily visible from the pool deck, (d) The recirculation system or disinfection feeding equipment is missing or not functioning. (e) A main drain grate is missing, unsecured., improperly secured, damaged, or does not meet the requirements of 64E-9,007(3 0)(f)2. by the time allowed. (.f) Operation without a valid permit, (g) Direct suction exists on the main drain or other outlets, except vacuum fittings, automatic surface skimmer(s), and their equalizer grates provided the flow velocity through the grate does not exceed 1.5 feet per second, or the corrective actions specified in 64E-9.007(3)(b) and (10)(f) are not completed by dates specified. (b) Any other conditions which endangers the health, safety, or welfare of persons using the pool, which may include, but is not hinited to, a drowning hazard, broken. glass, sharp edged or broken tile or metal, fecal accident(s), electrical code violation, or severe biological growth, The division or department may , attach a sign that states "Pool Closed. This pool is not in compliance with Cbapter 64E-9, F.A.C., and may endanger the health, safety or welfare of persons using this facility". With the department's permission, the pool operator may remove signs from the pool area immediately following correction of the cited ' 30 1 1 n 1 1 1 1 1 1 deficiencies provided the county health department is notified of this action. (2) Correction of Unauthorized Modifications (a) When it is discovered that a pool has been modified from the department approved plans and application, corrective construction and replacement shall be allowed to occur to bring the pool into compliance with the plans and applications as approved without the requirement for a modification permit, unless any of the following exist: 1. Critical conditions identified in 64&9.017(1)(d) and (g) above are discovered. 2. The original approved plans and application are not available for verification. 3. The extent of the unauthorized modification cannot be readily determined by the department or the design engineer. 4. The corrective construction or replacement will place the pool in violation of current pool construction rules. 5, The construction requires concrete work or placement of underground pipes. 6. Other unsanitary or unsafe conditions apparent to the department or the design engineer. (b) Whenever any of the conditions numbered 1 through 6 above exist, the owner shall make application to the department with form DH 914 pursuant to 64E-9.005(1) for a modification permit to authorize any construction required to restore the condition of the pool to an approved or original condition. Rulemaking Authority 381.006, 514.021, 514.05 FS. Law Implemented 381.006, 514.021, 514,04, 514.05, 514.06 FS. History-New 10-5-93, Formerly 1 OD-5.146, Amended 12-27-98, 5-27-04, 5-24-09. 64E-9.018 Public Pool Service Technician Certification An individual who services a public pool by maintaining the cleanliness, water quality and chemical balance of public pools shall be certified. To be certified an individual must demonstrate knowledge of public pools. Examples of such. knowledge include: pool cleaning, general pool maintenance, make-up water supply, bacteriological, chemical and physical quality of water and water purification, testing, treatment, and disinfection procedures. To ensure that the pool technicians are knowledgeable, said technician shall attend a training course of national recognition that is approved by the department of at least 1.6 hours in length and shall pass a test acceptable to the department. Certification is conferred upon an individual and is nontransferable. Certification does not imply any licensure and specifically not that of contractor as regulated by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation tinder Section 489.105(3)0), (k), or (1), F.S. A certified pool technician may not affect the structural integrity of the pool or equipment, and shall not delegate work to others, including employees, that are not themselves certified under this section, or otherwise exempt from this provision per Chapter 514, F.S. (1) Training shall include the following study topics for the hours indicated: (a) Swimming pool calculations I hour; (b) Filter type and filtration circulation 4 hours; (e) Water chemistry - balancing & testing 5 hours; (d) Spas and warm water pools I hour; (e) Pool and spa maintenance 2 hours; (f) Operational and safety requirements 2 hours; and (g) State health code Chapter 648-9, F.A.C., I hour. (2) Course materials must be provided that cover the required topics in detail. The course approval shall be contingent upon their meeting the items listed in subsection (1) above and the subjects listed in Section 514.075, F.S. The test approval shall be contingent upon all of the questions being related to the subject areas listed in subsection (1) above and the subjects listed in Section 514.075, F.S., with at least 10% of the questions from the subject areas in paragraphs (l)(a) through (f) above, and the remaining 40% covering any of the seven pool subject areas listed in, rule or Section 514.075, F.S. The minimum passing score for the test shall be no less than 70% correct for all questions. There shall be a minimum of 50 questions. (3) Any individual or organization requesting the department to review their courses for compliance with the requirements of this rule, must submit copies of their training materials to the department prior to providing that training within the state. A copy of the test to he given, answers to the test questions, and a statement indicating the length of time a classroom topic will be conducted shall be included. The department shall review the materials and inform the applicant of its findings within 60 days from receipt of all training materials. (4) The department shall deem certified any individual who has been proven certified by a course of 31 1 i national recognition., (5) This requirement does not apply to a person or the direct employee of a person permitted as a public , pool operator under Section 514.031, F.S. Further, persons licensed under Section. 489.105(3)6), (k), or (1), F.S., shall be deemed certified. (6) Proof of certification shall be posted conspicuously in. the equipment room of each pool serviced or must otherwise be available for inspection by the department. , (7) Any reference to department approval shall state no more than: "This course is approved by the Florida Department of Health for student certification as a Public Pool Service Technician under Chapters 514, Florida Statutes, and 64E-9, Florida Administrative Cade." Ruletnaking Authority 381.006, 514,021, 514.075 FS. Law Implemented 514.025, 514.075 FS. History- New 9-25-97, Amended 5-27-04, 5-24-09. 32 1 1 1 1 1 it 1 1 fl 11 Pinellas County Health Department PHONE: (727)536-7277axt. f ??4 Off ice of Environmental Health Services FAX. (727) s36-72sa 4175 Fsst Bey or., suite 300. Clearwater, F6 33764 221 PUBLIC SWIMMING POOL RENOVATION SURVEY Facility Name 44.6 CvZormit #1= Volume Time in'.)_?10/` Address ,c? MVP Date Time out This survey constitutes written apprgv:11 for the proposed reliovstion of the above referenced pool. All requirements checked below must be addressed, as per Chapter 64E-9 FA,C, and applicaljlr:te. county Upon codes. Tht completion of rtm nt mu department tntt tstbe please call t pro) his writing before resurfacing boritns and f gr resurfacing is comple, please ac t in office to schedule a renovatii?n inspection, Contractors shall field verify conditions before beginning construction. A New pool surface must be white or light paste( In color, smooth and slip resistant. X Y Item RE I11R special attention NA Y Not A 1. jd.AII ters Applicable Within 'i inch of level 6. le Depth Markings Watotlino the presont 8. Accurule within 3.inches at 36' off wall Gutter slope not to excrrod 2 incheb., p ! 4 inch height, legible numbers and letters pool flies In good condition c -Vnrts as FEET & INCHES or"F7•" & "IN" Repair broketl or non-removable praies d. Curb provided. markings place on inside and AA o (or top) of curb 2 Step and Ranch Tile Markings 8. AAo curb; markings placed Inside pool at waterline a• Dark in color (Munnell Colnr Voiun o to 4) and flush-rut into dock within 2 feet of wnte+r b. 2 inch ,silp;re?istan trend J riser llte or f• N/ arizurttal surface tiles slip.resistant 2 by ?It inch ??yc? buiser M o g• Maximum distance 25 feet h,Slope break and deep point markings required ;i. ?i tope Break an pools with diving bowl slopes 2 to 6 inch dark, continuous tile marking 'Ail markings shalt be flush b.I Safely line rr:uunted 2 feet toward shallow end ?iromslope 0r;;ng racesed anchor 7 a, d ors: Ht2_" From a'?a• SecurElyanchorod Into deck - v b. 3-6 Inches from wall and fact snug to wali, c. 9 Existing ladder is silie end In good condiUon° `it new ladder 1s required, it must be crass-bracod" and 28" minimum above dock & e14 5 3-3 $' S.? ? r SIPS and Handrails" HeCgh!r 'StepJeGk x. Step riser heights st><.1II nol excood 12-inches b• &Intermedlate riserheights uniform C m A0 slo Diving Ma kings Installed in areas not approved for diving b.* Spelled out in 4 inch high letters or 4Inch intemational "No Diving" symbol c. Slip resistant tiles within 2 feet of water d. Maximum dletehce - 24 feet Other 8. Replace the main drain grate/s and secure b. Replace mushroom inlets with flush style inlets c. heck/repair alt underwater fighting gore "anorak"s extend Above bol(cm slep HIS sU EY EXP(Rl=$ T R 'i Y A d..2. Handrail(s) sacurDly? anchored into dock and i Riser heights 01 ZZ Existing step ?p Handrails must be 8" handrail Is safe and Ir) above d told and bottom R stepitign' r e (? ?r f ? f pillt?11as C Offic untY Health t saf Frl pvironme mot ,rital Dervartment PHONE; l727J J3? . 1. ?. nUEgx S VV ast a$r or., suite 3010 c>aFireal# hSe Service, FAX: 1'727aan U38-?zr7 eXi ? MMINQ p -33764 . ©oL RENpVAT1aN SURV?'Y ' Facility Alarne N'o Address 1'U ?ll Z pin ' !S r vI; 77 74e cAt...inspector Q Received b _ / JZ' This sun+e V rmJ# ?.. VOlume Y u adconsfrtutesdressed written apPl'ov% writ; , far the '"•"_--. *rr"e fn kopie rasa as#e affipQ to riacfn as beer CltiaptprGgE_t)? ?8ed renovation of a Tlme o -?? r lit New the above schedule 91nf1 and aftj?r ands pool su renovatio resurFaein Pplicable count erenced x m %e "lase ast be 1 inspection g Is aem J y cod" ,. This Aonl, All a ui 7. rn ?U1Rs whits or tight paste, j 'tractors shalt fe flpon cam fell dopartinent rnustronients aheckc?d Gutters ?? S'G't%is1 s##s n color, smooth d verify c,,, t On of this pro's be contacted in a Withi , tltierl and $if p rosi ions b4 fora P)9;380 call t b n inch of level tant. beginning cdnstr hig f WAterline rile NA " Not ,4 uttion_ Of ?? Gutterslo Pont Pplrc able e, r! Al( pa of ti(esein aood ec ned 2 inches 0 1, S -gjgu a. Depth iNarkings pair broken or nan_ dtrion b. urata wlfhll? 3 Inches at 36° Z removable 4 inch height, le "ep and grates ?Unlts $rbic n off-wal! ? G a' l9coi Tilo MarP:i b nark in color ngs inch 4!i _ y ?Mun;?ll lyOro V?llue f) to 4 2 by % inc?t. Uer]d / "Isar tNQ o 1 3 ? ?? rnq S? bultnose the r `LU/#lope Break b, -2- 2 SfQ6inch dark, continuo ?m king sIline mounted 2 le et file mall Pc break using et t toward shallow .ond 4. 41,4k-dders., recessed anchor Sectrre yew w ch?o " Isom Waif ,b I L% 3-6inches fro rer; inta deck ?_'? ~ E s1 re 9 ladder J8 afe and !nt snug to wa it wall 'inct 'Ifni; ladde and ga-. minimum abavQaaerk ust he cro goo condttion* racgd cr. fps and Handrits„ H10,g b. fI/e lnt Step riser heiyhis shall ? tt ?-? „sfep? e. tr onnsdiate riser h nxrn deck d' a??ldratf 14-h pht8 uniforrnd 12rrnChes boffo (g) securely - 1 above boll.1 d, 6 trrrrunts INCHES and latfrrs Curb prov ded? or "! 7 & 11N. e. ?U/ outsrde or illftings place /o Curb: tap) of curb on inside end Arid bush c f l 'n9a declaced "'side pool at w Hnriz411 I sur?Ce k Wllhln 2 leer of Water h, t$taximum distan fiI0s slip-resistant M1 lope break and deep feet *Air rn on Pools with dlvin b Point Markin., re arkipgs shall h 9 oWt slopes quired e gush X o l?ivin b.' tP'%telipd Inakg-rssnot p w??elled out in 4' h chlpl raved for diving c I lip r afional NO Diving',xy eaior 4 inrh . ?1iesistant tiles d. Maxirrlunl disf within anrr, _ 2 feet of water g ' 24 fn¢t Y--? f?thsr a. Peplece !h drain b, l7eptece mushro gr-ite/s and se c' . Check/re Inlets with cure pair all underu,at &jsh stvie it 1 fn step nr har4d M ate er llghting r et5 into d$afr and l' rMl? Sur s`rai sb, „ ?nd 8a ova rall 1s s Ri .--- ate. ar,?t p .? IV t=`.??t? d4ck+and btt?canditlp'? bo610 rtorn to r5 JyJy ?? lip /d ,S ?. P 5.. 7 1 QUALIFICATION APPLICATION OF PROSPECTIVE BIDDER CITY OF CLEARWATER CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS To: City of Clearwater Engineering Dept./Construction Division Attn: Alice Eckman, Construction Specialist 100 So. Myrtle Ave., Ste #220 Clearwater, Florida 33756 or (PO Box 4748, Clearwater, FL. 33758-4748) DATE: PURPOSE: To provide the City with reasonable assurance that the prospective bidder on City of Clearwater formal construction contracts has the.financial assets, resources, work force, and work experience to successfully complete contemplated construction contract agreements with the City. CONTRACTOR FIRM NAME: BUSINESS ADDRESS: CITY - STATE - ZIP CODE: PHONE NUMBER: FAX NUMBER: E-MAIL ADDRESS: TYPE OF ORGANIZATION: (Individual, Corporation, Partnership, etc.) LIST ALL PRINCIPALS OF ORGANIZATION: (President, vice-President, Secretary-Treasurer, Partner, etc.) DATE ORGANIZATION BEGAN UNDER PRESENT NAME: OTHER NAMES AND DATES UNDER WHICH ORGANIZATION EXISTED: REFERENCES: 1 1 CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE NUMBER: ' INDIVIDUAL HOLDING LICENSE: ISSUING AUTHORITY: ' CLASSIFICATION OF LICENSE: HAS YOUR FIRM EVER FAILED TO COMPLETE WORK AWARDED TO YOU? IF SO, WHERE AND WHY? ' NUMBER OF FULL TIME EMPLOYEE'S DIRECTLY ON APPLICANTS PAYROLL: ' PRESENT VALUE OF AND GENERAL TYPE OF ALL CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT DIRECTLY OWNED BY THE APPLICANT (INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MOST RECENT FINANCIAL STATEMENT & INCLUDE LONG TERM ' LEASE/PURCHASE EQUIPMENT): ' The pre-qualification to bid limitation is an amount of dollars equal to the amount of the largest single construction project which has been successfully completed by the contractor. The pre-qualification ' amount is limited to the particular construction categories in which the Contractor is approved to perform work. This pre-qualification amount may be adjusted as the Contractor may successfully complete larger construction projects. The Contractor may exhibit where two ' or more similar projects were substantially accomplished by the Contractor at the same time where the aggregate amount of these projects in excess of the largest single project accomplished. This ' aggregate amount will be considered as the pre-qualification amount up to an amount equal to 150% of the largest single project amount. Pre-qualification amounts and categories may be limited as warranted by the City's experience with the Contractor's construction projects. LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT COMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR: 1. AMOUNT : $ ' 2. DATE OF COMPLETION: ' 3. TYPE OF WORK: 4. OWNER/REREPRESENTATIVE: T ' Address: Phone Number Fax Number Email Address 1 ALTERNATE PRE-QUALIFICATION AMOUNT IS BASED ON THE AGGREGATE TOTAL ' AMOUNT OF CONCURRENT PROJECTS COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WITH A MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF 1504 OF LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT LISTED ABOVE. LARGEST AGGREGATE AMOUNT COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WHERE WORK WAS PERFORMED ' AT THE SAME TIME: $ (Total aggregate amount determined from project list below) PROJECT 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. PROJECT 2 1. ' 2. 3. 4. 5 ' . 1 PROJECT 3 1. 2. 3 ' . 4. 5. AMOUNT: $ DATE OF START OF WORK: DATE OF COMPLETION: TYPE OF WORK: OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE: Telephone Number: - Address: Email: AMOUNT : $ DATE OF START OF WORK: DATE OF COMPLETION: TYPE OF WORK: OWNER/REPRESENTATIVEc_ Telephone Number: Address: Email AMOUNT: $ DATE OF START OF WORK: DATE OF COMPLETION: TYPE OF WORK: OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE:_ Telephone Number: Address: Email THE FOLLOWING THREE ADDITIONAL ITEMS ARE TO ACCOMPANY THIS APPLICATION: I- A current Financial Statement for your company which will be returned uncopied upon completion of review. 2. A list of major projects completed (each project is to include type of work, dollar volume, name and phone/fax ' number of project representative or owner sir/email address). ' 3. Three letters of reference are requested from owners your company has performed work for. The reference letters shall be on the owner's letterhead and contain the following information: ' A.) Location and type of work. B.) Dollar volume with your company. C.) Project owner's name, address & phone number. ' D.) Surety Company involved, if any. E.) Consulting Engineer or Architect, address and phone/fax number. F.) Start and completion dates. ' Pre-qualification is limited to particular construction categories or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully 3 Fax Fax Fax completed construction projects or extensive work in the category ' in conjunction with larger project work. Following are the general categories of construction work which are available for contractor pre-qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check those ' categories for which your firm is seeking pre-qualification approval- To receive approval in a particular construction category, your application must contain documentation of successfully completed work experience in that category. This documentation is to be ' included in your firm's completed project list as described above. In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has sufficient equipment, resources, and employees on your firm's direct ' payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient work force or insufficient resources will not be approved for pre-qualification or will not receive pre-qualification in ' particular work categories. ' ASPHALTIC CONCRETE RESURFACING ................... BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AND MODIFICATION ............... COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS ......... ................... COMMERCIAL SWIMMING POOLS ........................ ' CONCRETE FLAT WORK (CURBS, WALKS, COURTS, ETC.)—— CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES. . . . . . . ... ... OLITION .................................... DEM DESIGN BUILD . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . EXCAVATION/SITE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ' GUNITE RESTORATION ................................ HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING. . . . . . . . _ . ' INDUSTRIAL PAINTING .............................. . LANDSCAPE & IRRIGATION .......................... . MARINE CONSTRUCTION.. . ' MARINE DREDGING ................................... ROADWAY AND PARKING LOT CONSTRUCTION ............... ' SANITARY PUMP STATIONS ........................... SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS ........................ STORMWATER MANAGEMENT CONSTRUCTION ................. ' TENNIS COURTS .................................... 4 ' URBAN STREETSCAPE ................................ WASTEWATER & WATER TREATMENT FACILITIES............ ' WATER AND FORCE MAINS .............................. WELL CONSTRUCTION .................................. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS TRUE AND CORRECT TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE. FIRM: BY: Please Type SIGNATURE: TITLE: Owner, President, etc.) DATE: 6 I BOND.NUM.B R: FLC 65316 CONTRACT. BiC]1\'D ' STATE OF FLORIDA OUNTY .OF:.PINI LLAS KNOW ALL MEN BY T.>fnRESE.PRESENTS: That we ff NEIL;L S POOLS. INC. Contractor and Y-ONE WACHOVIA. '?K iin„the amount of NIN)E1?E? N 'I'?IEIQU5A1'1iD NINE a HUNDRED certified : HUNDRED T check V.E, from AND NO CENTS (S.l9,921.0.0 of-bid bond. ' Merchants Bonding Company, 2100 Fleur Drive, Des Moines, Iowa 50321-1158 (800) 678 - 8171 H.EREINA..FTER CALLED THE.; "Surety"i are held. and Emily bound. into the City o#', Cic;irw.ater,. •" Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner'"): in the penal sum cif. ONE HUNDRED NINETY-VINE THOUSAND, 1"tVl?0 XIUNIDRED TEN DOLLARS. AND NO CENTS (5199; .1{1.10). or the administrators, ?wcc,essors, and assigm fm }payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executor. ' the faithful performance of a oeitain written contract,.. bated theme day off ?'?an ? 201.0, entored into between the Contractor tend the. City of Clearwatm, for: M ' MORNINGSIHE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS (119-0056-PR) A copy.o# which Said.GOa.).trttic.t is i1lCarporttted. lictreiili by rof?ercgGe urid l5 tTaa'de a ltart'llereLlf a5 if'fill? ' co pid li.erei.ra, NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the ' Contractor .shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of:said contract; including; the :unc-yeAr'.guarantee: of material and laltor; and.his obligations thereunder, including the contract: documents (Which:include:tli:e Advertisement for Bids, Fonn of Proposal, F.onn bfContract, Form of ' Surety Bond,.1axstrudiions to Bidders; Lien at Conditrians and Tcciaaucat. Specifieutions) and. the Plam and: Specifications therein referred. to and rhade'a part thereof, and 'such alterations ;.is mays be made in said. Phins and Specrficatiolis as dierein,proyid6d for, and shall indemnify mid save:hamless the said bwncr against and franc all costs, expenses., damages,. injury or conduct, want of care or ' skill, negligenu or default; including. patent:uifringonthU on. theprirt of the said C'r7:iatraofor agents nr employees, in the execution or Performance of said contract,. including. e;rivrs in the plawq furnished by the Contractor; and farther, if such "tbrttractor" or "Contractors'" Miall promptly malzc; ' paynients to all perso . na supplying him, them or it lahor.:material, wid supplies used di.roctly oi` incliner tly l y sail Contractor, Contractors,. S.ub-.Contractor, or Sub Cotjtractot:S, in `flee prosecution 0. ibe work provided for in said C o ntraot, this ohligatioa shall be void, :litho wise; tYte C.:ontiaetor anti ..y agree to pay to tlie:,C weer any difference befwCie the sutra to which the ' Surety jointly and several]' saki Contractor would be entitled on the ccunpletipn of the Gantl`4c ,. anti. tltat. winch, ilie Outncr may be obliged to pay for the cornpletioh of.Wd: work by contract or otherwise, Vic, any damages, direct or ' indirect, or consequential, which:sa.id 0Wner.may, sustain on account of:surh wdrk, or oil account of the. failure of the said .79ntradtor to properly and in ill tltitnp, keep.ancl;erecute all the provisions. of' said contract. 1 11980 :1. 1 " Pinellas Pools, Inc_ 1234 Alternate 19 North, Holiday, FL 34691 (727) 934 - 8284 "" City of Clearwater P.O. Box 4748, 100 South Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33256 (727) 562 - 4782 1 ' CON 'RA.'CT.AOND (2) .And the s5ald Contraeta'r Fwd 'Surety hereby further bind: themselves, Of f. suii:eesscus.' exc(001s, ' administrators, fiend assigns, jointly aiad severally; :thut:..ihry`will an}ply; and. lirl,ly. proloc-1 i'lie said Owner agairnst,. and will tray ariy. and all amounts., d4magosi cost's .find judgments which, inay be recQvered.:agaitlst or-which'the-C7thttr.er may be called upon to pay: to any person d.r c'aia.-lior=atiCrt9 I)t' mason.cif any damages arising from. the performance of said work, of ..ctl; lt4 rel ttzr er inHiritcnlr ncc ' thereof;. or the niaiuter of doing tha same or the neglect. of the t iid:Contractor r,r his agents or seruatatsor lfic iaxilirirper perf'ortxlancc a'f the .sai.ii wark by tlae:C"-aratractctir Kir, laic ?1?errta ar serven:ts, or the infringements of any:paiem rights .by-moron of the use of any ;material furnished, car %vork done- as ' afbrisaid', or othemise. .. s, heirs, And fire . said 6ntractor, and ?S urety hereby furthO bind thenlwlves, dl e IT sticu? ssar. ' e . xecirtors, administrators', aid:assigns jointly and soverally+ to rppay'the uw:net any stirs which Tile Owner may be i:ompelkd td pay l?ecarase:.of arty liwi for labor material firiiiislied for lll.'e.work' embraced: by said Contract. 00::t h. igc, ext0n-%i0h 6f; at al ' An&the said Surety;.fdr tli.evulue received, hereby atiptalates:and agrees th' time, :alteration or :addition to flag terms 'uf the coritruct or` to the: work to ho p,rrrforntled. thoreunder or the sp.ecificatiotis.accompatnyitig the sanaie shall in any wry aff'ectits obliga.tioniq oil this :hind! and it ' does :hereby Waive'notice of:ak y such chai ge; extension ;of.tirrte„alteration or:ttdditior,.lb'll>? tcttlt't"crl •,. the contraact or to the work or4o the specifications. 1 ,. = It+I 7'IEST:lllV![)NY WHE1tEdF,'witn>~ss tine hands and seats af'tHe:p:oies fic;cc:to thi*',?,,,;,.;?.-? ? day of _ ZO l U 't 1CLL f P Silk . ' ATTEST. Merchants Bonding,Company SVAETY ?. 4: iESQ: kly: ' 1?Ili-FL??.'rl Mia Bush, Attorney-In-Fact & FloridaeetatAgent.-; eCar cci Br own & Brown of Florida, Inc. ' l; ;? ' +C[3117N°hE lt ;INE.n.' P.O. Box 15519, Tampa, FL 33684 (813) 226 - 1322 Mia Bush, Attorney-In-Fact & Florida Resident Agent ' -__.-.-.:......:.... .............. 688 2 MERcHANi7s!?k BONDING COMPANY POWER OF ATTORNEY Know All Persons By These Presents, that the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), a corporation duly organized under ' the laws of the State of Iowa, and having its principal office in the City of Des Moines, County of Polk, State of Iowa, hath made, constituted and appointed, and does by these presents make, constitute and appoint Joseph W. LoPresti, Steve Ayers, Anna Lee Duncan, Mia Bush, Mary Jane Cnvyn ' of Tampa and State of Florida its true and lawful Attorney-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to sign, execute, acknowledge and deliver in its behalf as surety any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances or other written obligations in the nature thereof, subject to the limitation that any such ' instrument shall not exceed the amount of: LIGHT MILLION ($8,000,000.00) DOLLARS and to bind the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bond or ' undertaking was signed by the duly authorized officers of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), and all the acts of said Attorney-in-Fact, pursuant to the authority herein given, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of-Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following Amended Substituted and Restated By Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) on November 16, 2002. ' ARTICLE II, SECTION 8 - The Chairman of the Board or President or any Vice President or Secretary shall have power and authority to appoint Attorneys-in-Fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. ARTICLE II, SECTION 9 - The signature of any authorized officer and the Seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or Certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually fixed. In Witness Whereof, MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) has caused these presents to be signed by its President and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed, this20th day of May , 2009. \I%G Co ' a•:? 1933 C. c MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) STATE OF IOWA COUNTY OF POLK ss. President On this 20th day of May 2009 , before me appeared Larry Taylor, to me personally known, who being by me duly sworn did say that he is President of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), the corporation described in the foregoing instrument, and that the Seal affixed to the said instrument is the Corporate Seal of the said Corporation and that the said instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its Board of Directors. In Testimony Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Des Moines, Iowa, the day and year first above written. STATE OF IOWA COUNTY OF POLK ss. 1 dt. CINDY SIUIY7'H IWI.4?0 Commission Number 173504 oW? My Commission Ex Ires March 16, 2012 Notary Public, Polk County, Iowa I, William Warner, Jr., Secretary of the MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the POWER-OF-ATTORNEY executed by said MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL), which is still in full force and effect and has not been amended or revoked. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand.and affixed the seal of the Company on this 1 day of March 2010 . POA 0001 (1/09) .- -..a?•Q`N?7 •C®?t.-• -'???pRp D ?.- F.s4.• y 1933 e: Secretary CONTRACT This CONTRACT made and entered into this,6' day of Mw? , 2010 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and PINELLAS POOLS,_INC. of the City of HOLIDAY, County of PASCO and State of FLORIDA hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS (09-0056-PR) IN THE AMOUNT OF: ONE HUNDRED NINETY-NINE THOUSAND, TWO HUNDRED TEN DOLLARS AND NO CENTS ($199,210.00) ' In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and ' assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as ' contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ' ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR ' DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS ' OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. 1 1 Page 4 CONTRACT (z) 1 In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: ' employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees ' or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the ' Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1.000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. ' It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or ' sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional ' bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and ' provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. I Page 4 1 1 CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER 1 IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA 1 By: 3-? William B. Horne, II City Manager 1 Countersigned: By: 1 Frank Hibbard, Mayor-Councilmember u 1 (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). y `N LW ° ?' vcw Attest: l , 1 C thia E. Goudeau, City Clerk ; 11;A wti 1? 4,dwo?I?Y " (Contractoz) By: ? LSEAL) I Page 5 Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney ' CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT (CORPORATION FORM) STATE OF COUNTY OF ' On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, ' deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of PINELLAS POOLS, ' INC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 1234 ALTERNATE 19 NORTH, HOLIDAY, FLORIDA 34691 (herein, the "Contractor"). ' That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of 2010 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as 1 Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS (09-0056-PR) ' That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature ' nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. ' That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. ' That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. ' The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. ' Sworn and subscribed to before me PINELLAS POOLS, INC. AFFIANT ' This day of 52010 BY: ' NOTARY PUBLIC ' My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT 1 Page 6 PROPOSAL ' (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall ' fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to ' become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this ' Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on twm 2-1 2_01C) ' Bank, for the sum of (s q 1 (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). ' The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: q I ? dct "F?.,, _ y 2 %A W ?l\? barn \?L . t? o r ?v-. Z 14 tt. (? Ho fidcc l Z t? . 1?r (id l_ 3`? ('91 Signature of Bidder:/ (The bidder must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual). SectionV Contract. Bond. and Bid Form.doc Page I I Revised: 5111/2006 1 581.139 (100/pkg Rev 01) N ^ O cp o ? T O , w ; - - r y 03 N - r I _ r i O - ru j LP1 a O 0 - © . Q ' O O So I R'' CD _ .J a b m V O f N V v ? C Co O k_ O 3 y CD ?1? PROPOSAL (3? The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. ' Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. By. Title:e ??..;5 I ?.e Nl ' Business Address of Bidder: City and State: Zip Code Dated at , this T I s? day of _,_) p1.Y11m , A.D., 29J 0 1 1 SectinnV Contract. Bond, and Bid Form.doc Pagc 12 Revised: 5/11/2006 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: e_ (Name of Bidder) Z; (Signature of Of >cer) 7 (Title of Officer) //G //6 9 (Date) SectionV Contract. Bond. and Bid Form.doc Page 13 Revised: 5/11/2006 1 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR ' ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION EST' UNIT TOTAL ' UNIT TY. A. Following items included in base bid: PRICE I. Base bid shall include all work as required in the contract drawings and specifications and addendums prepared by G B Collins Engineering PA Inc for the Morningside Aquatic ' Center Pool Renovations - Project No. 09-0056 - PR Lump Sum 1 $1114 000• co 1 Provide necessary procedures for crack repairs of pools shell ' after sounding and sand blasting pool has been performed the pool contractor shall inspect the surface with the owner to dctermine the quantity of lineal feet of actual crack repair is required to be performed and will be paid by the quantity ' of lineal feet crack repairs made allowance 150 lineal feet. Lineal feet 150 $ 3. Removal, refurbish as necessary and reinstall 2 one meter diving platforms includes electrical bonding hardware, anchor ' bolts, templates & assisting in placement of the anchor bolts prior to pouring concrete pool deck by others Lump Sum I g 000-00 4. Performance Bond Lump Sum I $ 4 00.0 5. SUB TOTAL OF LINES 2, 3, & 4 S 1$00cO ' 6. TEN PERCENT CONTINGENCY* (10% CONTINGENCY OF THE SUB TOTAL OF ITEM 5 *(Note contingency funds shall only utilized upon written approvd by the Owner or the ' $ L (l J ' owner s representative to utilize these fund for additional Scope of Work not indicated in item 1 of the Bill of Quantities. Contingency funds not utilized in the implementation of his contract shall be returned to the owner by final change order during close out of the contract.) ' 7• GRAND TOTAL - ITEMS 5 and 6 INCLUDES 10% CONTINENCY CONTRACTOR NAME:-') ' BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ITEM 7 WHICH INCLUDES TEN PERCENT CONTINENCY S N b ( um ers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ITEMS 7 WHICH INCLUDES TEN PERCENT CONTINGENCY $ U Ll 1 (Words) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. THE CITY OF CLEARWATER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT ALL BIDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTE ALL BID ITEMS SHALL BE PRICES AND BLANKS LEFT ON ANY ITEM THE BE WILL BE CONSIDERED A NON RESPONSIVE BID AND WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED IN AWARDING THIS PROJECT. THE CITY OF CLEARWATER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELECT ANY AND OR ALL OF THE ALTERNATE ITEMS AND OR REJECT ANY AND ALL ALTERNATE ITEMS. THE ALTERNATE ITEMS SELECTED SHALL BE UTILIZED IN THE TABULATION OF THE PROJECT AND SHALL DETERMINE THE LOW BIDDER TO BE AWARDED THE MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS Project No. 09-0056-PR SectionV Contract. Bond, and Bid Form.doc Page 14 Rcviscd: 5/1 1/2006 ' BIDDER'S PROPOSAL CONTINUED PROJEC'T': MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is ' complete and fully integrated into the project. Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the status of each ' Alternate, Indicate whether Alternates have been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to Alternates. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described ' under each Alternate. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. ' ITEM UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT TY. PRICE ' B. The following are alternate add items: I . Add alternate pool contractor to provide Hydrazzo Surfacing in lieu of Marauiz surfacing. The contractor must ' provide a 10 year warranty for the Hydrazzo surfacing L. S. 1 14 ?Q?_ 0 2. Should Owner elect not to provide new concrete deck i--?- pool around main pool contractor shall provide cost for ' removal of concrete at gutter drains to install new Hayward SP 1019 Socket LS 3. Saw cut concrete deck for owner electrical contractor to install Electrical conductor for bonding the metal pool elements of main Pool and special purpose pool 650 lineal feet LS. I 3';-0 00 ' 4. TOTAL OF LINE ITEMS 1-3 ADD ALTERNATES ()?i.1D a CONTRACTOR NAME: ??CIS ?vols,t.. , Pabee(.t Wa.AQ(Ner ' THE CITY OF CLEARWATER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO SELECT ANY AND OR ALL OF THE ALTERNATE ITEMS ABOVE AND OR REJECT ANY AND ALL ALTERNATE ITEMS. THE ALTERNATE ITEMS SELECTED SHALL BE UTILIZED IN THE TABULATION OF THE PROJECT AND SHALL DETERMINE THE LOW BIDDER TO BE AWARDED THE MORNINGSIDE AQUATIC CENTER POOL RENOVATIONS - PROJECT NO. 09-0056-PR 1 SectionV Contract, Bond, and Bid Form.doc page 15 Revised: 5/11/2006 1 From' Brown & Brown Insurance Date: 1/21/201011:12:15 AM C° CERTIFICATE CAF LIABI ?Ilr wcen Brown & Brown Insurance 17757 US Highway 19 N, Ste 660 P.O. Box 2456 Clearwater FL 33757-2456 Phone: 727-461-6044 Fax: 727-442-7695 NSUgw William Woodrow Hooper Jr dba Pin 114 Pools Ine 1234 Alternate 19 Holiday F1. 34691 COVERAGES ITY INSURANCE OPIDAY ?ATEI"NIDDKYY"' PINE-21 01/21/10 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INGURERA. Transportation Ins Co INsuRERR American Casualty Company INSURER C Zenyh Insurance Company INSURER O INSURER ('- C `•-.` THE POLIGBB OF INgURAHCE U BLED BELOW HAVE BEN ISSUlD TO THE IN6DiEq NyMlp ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PENOD INOCATFD. MOINTTNS1A1N11 ryG =e ANY REQUIREMENT TERMtlRLONOTON OL AN' LONTTUtT OR OTHER pOCUMENYWITH Re;PGCT TD WHICHTH'CZ RZTFMAYBE ISSUED OR MAY PEOTAW . THE IN6UTtANCE AFFDROED BY THE PtlLICIE6 QEOCrBEED 115WN 16 SU B/ECT TO ALL 711E TERMe. EfT, Wg1oNg AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICES. AGGREGATE uurg gHONN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID LLAIM$ INBR p'L POLICYEFiEaME POUCYEIPIRATICN -- LTR NBRD TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMOISR DATE I?NO/YTYY1 DATE MPLOWMY) LW1T 6 OENERAL LIAWLITY EACH OCCURRENCE n S 1000000 A. X cDMUENC?.><o?ReRAiu,.oa . rr 82075Q17466 11/17/09 11/17/10 DAVAtrrb mT PR EMISE& E s 50000 ll 1I 000UV 1 _ ( a _ _ CLAIMS NwD[ I JC 1 OccuR MEq UP%my-p-) 5 5000 X Contractual Liab PERSONAL&ADVINxRY S 1000000 X $UP Up Coverage GENERALAOCREGATE 5 20000 00 OENL AGGREGATEUWTAPPLIE6 PER. - PRODUCTS -COMPAOPAGG n 5 2000000 N FpL- Lx ,Pm UCC -1 F AUTOMOBILE LIAWLRy B X CONIHINEDBINGLLUMM r 5 1000000 ANY AUTO A2075817516 11/17/09 11/17/10 LA ACdtl .) ALL MN50 AUTOS BODILY INJURY BLHEOULEOAHTDS IPar rygpn) 5 MINEDAUTOs BODILY INJURY NOH-OWNEOAUTOG IPa•At Mlfl S PROPERTY DAMAGE (PV eµpPrij 5 GH1iAOE-11 AUTO ONLY - GA ACCIDENT ANY AUTO OTHERTHAH ACID S -? ALTO ONLY ACC 6 EXC ESB I UNSRELLA LIABILITY !ACM OCCURRENCE 5 ..._ OCCUR Q G-AIMIg MAD! AGGREGATE 5 ^- 5 DEDUCTIBLE ?.. .-".? -..,..._? 5 RETENTION 3 WORKERS CONIPENBAnON W' STAY!- OTH- ANDENPLOVERF'LIABILTY Y1N X mRV LS.. ER [' ANY PROPRIETOR,PARiNFJIiL%ECUTVE 2070045201 OIFFICER,WMBER EKCLLICED7 11/17/09 11/17/10 E.LEAC?HACCIDENT 500 000 (MNkWxY PNH) _ • IT7TU.t6Nrxltn AWAY E.L DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE y„" B 500000 `... .-.,., ? SPECIAL PRn)FIONG Nebr. EL. D1518ASE-POLICY LIAR' _ 5 500000 OTHER Equipment B2075817466 11/17/09 11/17/10 Rented $10,000 Ded $500 DEAD RIPTION DF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I E%CLU81ONs ADDED By ENDORSEMENT IBPEGAL PROV181ON8 ERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION CNOULDANY OF THE ABOVEDEEICRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE TH E EXPIRATION Tmv CITYCI7 DATCTHSREOP. THE IAAUING INBU RER WLL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAWD70 T HE LEFT. BU 'T FAILURE TO DO 808HALL City of Clearwater Purchasing Department WORE NO OBLIOA TION OR LIAEUIUY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, [TS AOENTS OR 100 S Myrtle Ave 3rd floor REPREAENTA IVfiB. Clearwater FL 33756 L=Z? CORD 25 (2009101) 1®88-200 1 AC RD CORPORATI N. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 1